Apple’s IBook Using In Schools Proposal Best Essay Help

Introduction iBooks have become very common in the teaching and learning environment (Levy, 1999). Their application has made the process of teaching and learning particularly enjoyable as they provide interesting sessions where the students can get illustrations for better understanding of the content of the book or other materials (Blane, 2003).

Teachers find this software advantageous as well since it has immensely reduced their workload meaning that they are no longer need to prepare their lesson plans on a daily basis because all the required information can be saved in the iBook.

These plans can be used for years unlike the printed ones that usually get worn out, and as such, there appears a need to prepare others with similar content, which might be tiring and taking a lot of time.

iBooks have modernized and changed the education system whereby before the technological progress, teachers used boards and chalk to explain the materials of the lesson.

It was tiresome for some and even harmful to the others (Levy, 1999) For example, it is unsuitable to those teachers who are allergic to chalk dust. In the modern learning systems, the teachers very often use iPods in order to engage the students in discussions.

Moreover, assignments can also be given to the students in soft copy (Minkel, 2003). A variety of books can be allocated by the teacher with the help of iBooks because they can be accessed easily by everyone, and they are inexpensive.

The fact that higher costs are associated with print text means that teachers can either purchase fewer print-based textbooks or opt for more iBook supporting electronic texts. Having access to a greater variety of texts encourages the students to read and develop a researching culture (Minkel, 2003). Thus, it can be stated that the iBook helps both the teachers and the students create a library of their choice

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This application has improved the education sector and learning process as through the embracement of this technology, students are able to access the teacher’s notes even when they are away from school (Blane, 2003). It has helped to curb the communication obstacles of effective learning.

The teaching environment has also become conducive for those instructors who have a lot of sessions to teach. They can now comfortably manage all of them since they do not have to carry books and other materials with them (Minkel, 2003). All their teaching materials can be stored in the iBook which has made the teaching enjoyable and comfortable. Due to this innovation, the teaching profession has moved to another level.

Variables Independent variable. Using of iBooks at school.

Dependent variables. The impact on learning as measured by the performance of the students

General review The iBook has been given much credit when it comes to the improvement of academic status (Minkel, 2003). Students were the major target when the introduction of this application was taking place. It is important to note that Apple Company has contributed greatly to the embracement of technology at schools as it has modified the electronics to suite the learning process.

Results of the research conducted point out that this software is widely used by both the teaching staff and students in a number of schools around the world (Minkel, 2003). According to Minkel’s study, students confessed that learning became much easier for them and more enjoyable as the idea of using iBooks while studying was adopted and accepted (Blane, 2003).

What is an iBook? An iBook is from the family of Apple Computers. IBooks have been put up after the invention of laptops that have been in the market since the year 1999. Upon invention, the iBook has been targeting the education and consumer markets. It has been made in such a manner to incorporate several applications. The iBook replaced the iMac in 2006. The iBook has become very popular among the citizens of the United States of America.

The iBook has transformed and changed the methods of teaching. It is no longer compulsory for a teacher to visit the classroom in order to conduct a lesson. Books can be distributed through iPods to students for them to master the material on their own.

In such away, each student gets an opportunity to more thoroughly understand the material since everyone reads it at his/her own pace any time he/she finds it comfortable. The interactive sessions between the readings also make the whole learning process enjoyable (Blane, 2003).

We will write a custom Proposal on Apple’s iBook Using in Schools specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More IBooks provide teachers and students with information that is up-to-date because they provide an easy access to the new and relevant information (Blane, 2003). It is also very comfortable because an iBook allows fast opening of books and various folders. It saves time and encourages the reader to read more and enjoy this process.

It also saves the students’ work meaning that when the battery goes off, nothing important is never lost; the system saves all the information automatically. In general, the use of iBooks is very convenient and easy enabling people of different ages to use the gadget.

Dependent variables The impact on learning is considered to be the dependable variable since it is used to measure if the use of iBooks has any positive or negative effects on learning. It is important to consider this variable since it is the determinant of the effects on learning after using iBooks at schools.

It has impacted on the learning process in the sense that it has made the students change their attitudes towards education. They have developed a positive attitude towards the learning process. As a result, their grades have improved.

Independent variable IBooks are used by students at school since each student who used the iBook will be tested to see if it has caused some effects on learning.

Purpose of the study The purpose of the study is to find out if the use of iBook at schools has any effect on the teaching and learning process.

Benefits of iBook The iBook has been found to have a lot of benefits. The most obvious advantage is that it saves space since it has a comparatively small size as only light materials are utilized in its manufacture. Because of such characteristics, the iBook is easy to carry around. When having different sessions of classes, it is really convenient (Minkel, 2003).

The iBook is also preferred by a lot of people since it has the ability to store a lot of class materials. It is manufactured in such a manner that several textbooks can be saved in it. It, therefore, reduces the need to carry various books.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Apple’s iBook Using in Schools by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Reading an iBook is also very interesting because the user does not have to thoroughly peruse the entire book in order to get a concept, the students can easily search there for the results to be displayed immediately. Such technology encourages the reader to read more. In some cases, the iBook is cheaper since there are no additional costs associated with it, for example, the printing costs, editor’s fee, among others.

This device is also preferred in learning institutions since it enhances understanding because the concept can be explained in various methods. A good example is the use of videos, 3Ddiagrams, interactive gallery and charts (Blane, 2003). The iBook can also be used for many other purposes.

Although it is used specifically for learning, it can also be utilized for entertainment purposes. This type of reading allows highlighting and taking notes. It also gives the students the option of sharing notes with the others. This encourages the culture of exchanging notes, as such increasing the probability of researching more (Berger, 2005).

How does iBook help the students? A n iBook helps students in various ways. It helps them compile their notes in an organized and easy way. This application organizes books and notes according to their content and subjects. This makes their reviewing quite easy. When reading a book, it is also possible to take short notes and highlight the important points, if necessary.

By doing this, it helps students understand more and focus on the parts that need a thorough consideration. Noting down the important points enables the students to better remember the information. Referring to these notes is not hectic, as when using textbooks because they are stored as books (Berger, 2005).

Passing examinations for these students is much easier since they have all they need at hand. The iBooks also lessen the students’ burden as they do not need to carry several books to and from school because the iBook has a huge storage space where each and every book they need can be stored (Levy, 1999).

How an iBook is effective in learning? Technology has come up with several ways due to which the learning process has been improved nowadays. The iBook is the latest of all. Apple Company invented this type of technology since most students have already embraced the technology. This type of learning has helped students understand their material of the lessons and pass the examinations well.

Statistics have shown that almost every student is aware of the iBook and willing to know how it is used. This device helps the students have an interactive session allowing the students to create and manage their virtual library in their own way. It allows the students to keep the books they desire and delete those that are of no use for them anymore.

It also enables one to exchange books online. This is cost effective since there are no costs of reproducing the book or lending costs like those at the libraries (Minkel, 2003). This application helps to sort different books according to the subjects and content. It makes it easier for the students to understand.

Since this tool ensures enjoyable learning, most students have adapted to it. It is boring at times to hold a book in one’s hands and read it (Berger, 2005). This software is a savior for many students because it is designed in such a way that it shows a book with its full preview which helps the students get the full information on the matter they have been searching for.

As a result, they are able to easily pass an exam. The software is organized in such a way that any document downloaded or written in Microsoft word is saved in the format of a book. This helps organize the work of a student; any time, the students are in need of the book they can easily access it.

iBook versus hard copy books The research has proved that iBooks are much better than hardcopy books are because the iBook can save a large number of books whereas the hardcopies do not allow that. They cannot be carried around since they are heavy (Gore,

[supanova_question]

History of Photography Culture Report essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Introduction

Photography during the Analogue Era

Photography in the Digital Era

Implications of Digital Pictures

Conclusion

References

Executive Summary Photography is a culture that has been present since the 19th century. However, the advancement in technology has greatly changed the manner in which the society regards photographs. During the analogue era, photography was used to store family memories.

However, in the digital era, photography is used as a means of personal identification and communication. To expound on this, this paper focused on the theories, background and the perception that the society had on both analogue and digital photographs.

The paper also expounded on the impacts that social networks and digital manipulation have on digital photographs. This brought about a deeper understanding of the changes that are being experienced in photography.

Introduction Photography can be regarded as an art as well as a science that aims at creating long lasting images. Images are usually created with the help of a lens that focuses the light that is either emitted or reflected by the object into a light sensitive material (Hirsch, 1997). During the early days, a photographic emulsion of the latent image was created on a film.

However, this film needed to undergo several chemical processes for the final image to be arrived at. However, with the advancement in technology, photography has developed. The quality of modern images is better, the process of creating images is much more effective and fast. Therefore, the resultant effects of photography have changed over time.

Photography can be traced back to the beginning of the 19th century. During the 1820s, Joseph Nicephore, a French inventor managed to create a photograph with the use of a camera Obscura (Dijck, 2008). However, he destroyed the image that he created while attempting to create a duplicate. However, several years later, he was successful once again to create a permanent image.

This marked the beginning of modern photography. Due to its success and efficiency, this new technique managed to replace traditional methods of creating portraits and images such as painting and carving. Photography was capable of capturing more details and information as compared to traditional methods of creating images and portraits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The stop capability of a photograph therefore played a critical role in determining the manner in which the society regarded photographs. During the early days, the society used photography as a means of storing memories. Unlike their analogue counterparts, digital photographs are easy to make. Their characteristics allow them to be easily manipulated to please the eye of the user.

With these differences, the question of whether the main purpose of a photograph is to safeguard a memory or represent the identity of an individual is always inevitable. To answer this question, this paper will focus on the history and development of photographs. It will compare and contrast analogue and digital photographs and determine the impacts that they have on an individual and to the society.

Photography during the Analogue Era Photography commenced during the 19th century. However, before photography came into play, several strategies had been advanced by man to capture images. Painting and carving are perhaps one of the main methods that man used to represent himself in a virtual form.

However, these works of art were not precise. They did not expressly represent the original object or field of view that they actually resembled. Photographs on the other hand were capable of actually duplicating and representing the exact image of the object in focus. This characteristic led to the development of the concept of photographic truth (Hirsch, 1997).

Several theories have been advanced by scholars to explain the relationship that exists between the image developed from photographs and the real world. A photograph always represents the image of an object exactly as it appeared.

The capability of an image to have a stop action that actually represents the truth of a given object at a given time played a critical role in increasing the credibility of photographs and photography at large.

Thus, as a result of the credibility, reliability and realism of photography, the development of photography was closely related to the industrial revolution, the scientific revolution and advancement in philosophy (Dijck, 2008). During this era, the world was experiencing a transformation that led to the emergence of modernism.

We will write a custom Report on History of Photography Culture specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, to capture the change in culture, industrialization, politics, and science, photography was used. Photography has played a critical role in presenting the visual representation of the development of the western world from the Renaissance period up to the modern era.

During this time, photography was highly related to the elite individuals of the society (Dijck, 1995). This included scientists, politicians, merchants and so on.

However, things took a different turn during the second half of the 19th century. George Eastman developed the film as a replacement for the rudimentary photographic plated in 1884 (Dijck, 1995). As a result, the size of cameras gradually reduced.

Developing pictures using the film technology was relatively easier and the resultant images were of superior quality. Most importantly, the cost associated with taking a photograph was reduced. During the beginning of the 20th century, Gabriel Lippmann developed the Lippmann plate that was capable of producing colour photographs.

With this advancement in photographic technology, the concept of photography slowly moved from the elite to the general population within the society. With this advancement, families relied on photography as a form of technology that enabled them to store their memories and experiences in material form for future reference (Dijck, 2008).

Photographs were used to show the growth and development of a given family. By the end of the 19th century, almost every family in the United States and Europe has a photo camera (Mitchell, 1992). This was the main tool that families used during the 20th century to display their growth, development and connectedness.

It is inevitable for any family during the second half of the 20th century to lack a photo album. Photo albums were always regarded as a means through which a family can reach out to its memories and reminisce. Thus, photographs were mainly used to represent the pictorial heritage of a given family.

Consequently, during the 19th and 20th century, photographs were used as a means of communication. During the 20th century, tourists took photographs of various scenarios and sites from all around the world. The photographs of the Grand Canyon, the Taj Mahal, Pyramids of Egypt, the Eifel tower and so on are good examples.

Not sure if you can write a paper on History of Photography Culture by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More These photographs not only portray the memories that the tourists had while visiting these areas but it also communicates to the viewer the beauty of the scenery that they were in.

This concept has gained wide application up to the modern era especially in marketing (Castells, 2009). Many advertising campaigns use photographs to pass their main message. By viewing the picture, the target audience ultimately gets the message being conveyed.

Photography in the Digital Era Technology is dynamic in nature. Thus, as photographs replaced carvings and paintings as the main mode of representation, since the 1980s, digital photographs have replaced analogue photographs. As a result, a lot of arguments have been presented for and against this change.

In analogue photographs, the light reflected by the lens from the object was captured in a chemical film that was inside a camera. It is the film that was processed to give the actual picture on an analogue image. Thus, the final image could not me modified or altered in any way whatsoever.

Digital images on the other hand are created using a different technique. The images are developed with the help of digital cameras that convert the light that is reflected from an object into digital code (Boyd and Ellison, 2007).

Unlike in the analogue technology where the image was inferred on an analogue paper, digital images can be inferred on a variety of components. These include components such as digital screens of camera, computers, cell phones and so on.

Despite the sophisticated technology behind the creation of digital images, the costs incurred are minimal. Technological advancements have made digital cameras to be reduced in size. As a result, cameras are available in most gadgets including cell phones. Thus, unlike in the 1970s where almost every home owned a photo camera, in the 21st century, almost every teenage and adult as his/her own digital camera.

This has greatly increased the ease at which individuals take photographs. Consequently, digital photographs are stored in codes. These codes can be interpreted in the form of algorithms. Thus, any component that can read these algorithms will have the capability of interpreting the image that it contains.

It is as a result of this fact that many components are capable of interpreting and displaying digital images (Boyd and Ellison, 2007). This capability enables the manipulation of digital images. Thus, users have the option of modifying or altering the content contained in digital images.

Finally, the algorithms have made it possible for digital images to be compressed as well as being stored in different formats. This attribute has greatly increased the portability and transmission of digital images over vast networks of media.

Digital photographs came about as a result of the advancement of the computer and developments in information technology (Binkley, 2003). As a result of computer imaging and the use of sophisticated softwares, man is now capable of generating digital photographs of almost any object within his field of view (Binkley, 2003).

Thus, as the development of analogue photographs was in line with the industrial and scientific revolution, the development of digital photographs has always been in line with the advancement in information, communication and technology. Thus, the computer and its accompanying components and softwares have replaced optical lenses, mechanical cameras and films (Castells, 2009).

At the present moment, people store their images on memory cards and CDs. Very few people use photographic films to produce photographs. The digital modes of storing images enable the users to view their pictures on their computers, televisions, cell phones or any other digital media.

This has slowly led to the facing off of family albums that were quite common in the homes of many families during the 20th century.

Implications of Digital Pictures The trend that is related to digital photographs has brought about a lot of arguments with regards to the ethical and social implication that digital pictures have as compared to their analogue counterparts. Digital images have always been regarded as the main factor that led to the decline of analogue photographs.

Many scholars regard digital photography as the main factor that led to the death of an era of analogue photography that lasted for over 150 years (Stewart, 2008). To many, this phenomenon has brought about the end of a photographic culture that has been present in the west from the 18th century to the 20th century.

This culture was mainly dominated by the maintenance of family memory with the help of photographs. However, due to their nature of application, digital photographs have been regarded as tools that support the personal identity of an individual.

The motives behind photographs have gradually changed with the emergence of digital photographs. Members of the new generations now use photographs to portray their individual images, interests and identities unlike the members of the older generations who used images as a means of storing memory and reminiscing (Stewart, 2008).

Several studies have been conducted to determine the reasons why teenagers take photographs. In most of these studies, it has emerged that teenagers take photographs as a means of social communication. However, the teenagers believe that they are taking photographs as a means of permanent record for their lives.

The disparity between their beliefs and actual behaviour significantly reveal the impact that digital photographs have on individuals and the society at large. During the analogue era, photographs were taken to show family lineage and bonds in families.

However, during the digital era, photographs act as a means of social communication through which an individual uses to reach out to his/her peers or members of a given group (Harrison, 2002). From a closer analysis, it is evident that teenagers interact more with their peers and individuals from their social circle as compared to how they interact with their parents and other family members.

With this realisation, a lot of individuals and scholars have argued that the culture of photography as it was known in the last two centuries has ended (Lindsay, 2004).

The 21st century has witnessed the development of a new mode of socialization, interaction and communication in the world; social media. Social networks are virtual organizations on the internet that have been created with the use of sophisticated computer softwares and commands. These networks enable individuals to interact with each other irrespective of their physical location, culture, background and origin.

With the use of these networks, people can share a lot of information with their friends, create and interact with new friends and discuss about several issues of concern. All this is possible without having physical contact with one another.

Examples of social networks include Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, YouTube, MySpace and so on. Social networks enable its users to interact with each other and through direct communication, sharing of information, pictures, videos and other forms of media files. However, the level and extent in which users access and share files is questionable.

This is because, a user can download, share or manipulate another user without his/her own consent. For instance, Facebook has the share option. Thus, your friends can share your pictures and videos without your consent as if they were originally theirs.

To some extent, this can be viewed as copyright infringement (Bennett and Charles, 2006). These trends are quite normal in the social network world and they question the morals and ethics behind digital photographs and the confidentiality and privacy that digital photographs and social network sites have.

Another issue that has raised questions about the ethics, morals, and reliability of digital photographs is the concept of digital manipulation. Analogue photographs were always associated with truth, realism and evidence of the physical world (Dijck, 2008).

This is because their images were actual representations of the objects they portray. Digital images also have the same capability. However, due to their digital nature, users can modify, copy, compress or network a digital image. Thus, man can alter the emitted light that has been digitalised to come up with an image that fits his needs and desires.

With the help of computer components and softwares, a digital photograph can be modified even further. Adobe Photoshop can be used to modify the digital codes and quality of an image. This concept is widely common in social networking, journalism, advertisement, and design (Stelzner, 2012). However, critics argue that modification of an image eliminates its element of reality since it does not

Conclusion The transition from analogue to digital photographs has always been characterised by a lot of debate. Analogue photographs have always been used to store family memories while digital photographs are being used as tools for expressing personal identity and communication.

Despite the criticisms that might be present, it is evident that digital photographs are in line with the prevailing culture and technology. However, to ensure that this advancement is effective and sustainable, the privacy of digital images needs to be guaranteed especially while being used in social media. This will ensure that the rights of users are not infringed while they are trying to achieve their social goals with the use of images.

References Bennett, C. and Charles R. 2006, The governance of privacy, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA: Binkley, T 2003, Refiguring culture, BFI, London.

Boyd, D. and Ellison, N. 2007, ‘Social network sites: definition, history and scholarship’, Journal of Computer-Mediated Communications vol. 13 no. 1, pp. 210-230.

Castells, M 2009, Communication power, Oxford University Press, New York.

Dijck, J 1995, Manufacturing babies and public consent: Debating the new reproductive technologies, New York University Press, New York.

Dijck, J 2008, Digital photography: Communication, identity and memory. Web.

Harrison, B 2002, ‘Photographic visions and narrative inquiry’, Narrative Inquiry vol. 12 no. 1, pp. 87–111.

Hirsch, M 1997, Family Frames: Photography, Narrative, and Postmemory, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, MA.

Lindsay, S 2004, ‘True photographs and false memories’, Psychological Science vol. 15 no. 3, pp. 149–54.

Mitchell, W 1992, The reconfigured eye: Visual truth in the postphotographic era, The MIT Press, Cambridge, MA.

Stelzner, M 2012, ‘Social media marketing industry report: how marketers are using social media to grow their businesses’, Social Media Examiner vol. 1 no. 4, pp. 12-30.

Steward, T 2008, Photography: A critical introduction, Sage, New York.

[supanova_question]

“WALL-E”: Dystopian Narrative Essay essay help: essay help

The movie WALL-E is an animated story about a robot named WALL-E who is endowed with irrational feeling despite its programmed nature. The robot falls in love with another advanced robot called EVE regardless the impossibility of robotic love. The story, therefore, uncovers the eternal confrontation between science and nature, reason and emotion, consumerism and environmentalism.

More importantly, the film focuses on the current trends in consumption, as well as degradation of humans who are confined to ‘programmed’ means of existence. The protagonist of the story is a robot that should clean up the Earth after it was abandoned by humans.

One the one hand, the story is a science-fiction environmentalist film; on the other hand, the picture is a dystopian narrative revealing the consequences of consumerist culture developed at the present times.

Despite the initial messages that the director intended to deliver, the film can also be recognized as an environmental precautionary tale about the negative consequences of consumption habits of humans. The author focuses on environmental pollution and obesity problems as the leading ones in posing threats to the future of our planet.

In particular, Howey argues, “WALL-E…is implicated within its own critique; its science-fiction conventions…raise questions about the way humans are “programmed” through education and consumer directives” (45). Moreover, the movie also embraces such important topics as ecological situation and attitude of younger viewers to the current environmental situation.

The dystopian narrative and genre of the film underlines these topics and provides both a fiction and realistic account for what might happen to humanity in the nearest future. In addition, genre conventions, along with the rules of science fiction, promote the engagement of the movie with the issues of programming and consumption.

In particular, the contemporary concerns with garbage disposal are highlighted to create a vivid image of the world future.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To emphasize the consumption patterns of the contemporary society, the movie refers to two types of consumerism. The first one – the consumption of object – results in towers of garbage that human left on Earth.

The second type – the consumption of narratives – is also represented in the movie, particularly in the scene when WALL-E watches Hello Dolly! and interprets the acts. As a result, the director relies to the cultural and social issues of youth, as well as compares current consumers with robotic creatures who are under the influence of media culture and programming.

Although the movie is oriented on youth audience, it still explores such urgent issues as garboard disposal, consumerism, and obesity problems. In this respect, Poore considers the movie as an interpretation of a new reality, the Semantic Web that contains piles of unnecessary information distorting the real world.

By creating the new semantic environments, humans become dependent on machines that are able to navigate the world. In addition, Poore argues, “A critical approach to ontology could take some of the same pathways that critical GIS has taken…but a most effective direction would be to combine ontologies with an examination of the local practices of users as they struggle with the technology” (116).

To enlarge on this issue, humans can also be represented as passive users who are confined to the existing patterns of consumption and who are reluctant to follow new lifestyles that could save the planet.

At the end of the movie, the robots call humans for action and make them believe that the Earth should be rescued from the technological expansion, despite the fact that they are representative of technological progress. Both active humans and machines start working on the Earth’s natural and environmental restoration.

The dystopian features of the movie are also highlighted in the way the directors describes the information realm within robots are working. Humans, therefore, have become too dependent on the information space introduced by the World Wide Web.

We will write a custom Essay on “WALL-E”: Dystopian Narrative specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In the story, the director emphasizes the virtual expansion, as well as its consequences for humans. Despite the criticism of technological progress, the movie proves that the world can be saved in case both the machines and humans are involved in collaborative work.

The movie is not only a representation of confrontation between human and machines, but an attempt to demonstrate humans that they can also become part of the computerized system. In this respect, the director describes WALL-E as the robot that is endowed with human characteristics.

He is capable of love and compassion and, therefore, he feels extreme anxiety about the future of the planet. In this respect, it is logical that the hero is described as a “intellectual, emotional, or spiritual” being (Beck 92).

The focus on psychological characteristics provides a sufficient explanation for outcomes of human-machine interaction. In the movie, “people are there as a sub-plot, a secondary issue that reflects the dangers of some machines and the generosity and benevolence of our heroes” (Beck 92).

Their aspirations and goals are not oriented on preserving the nature and environment. Lack of awareness of the ecological disaster makes them passive participants in the rescuing activities.

Apart from environmentalist and consumerist issues, the story reveals the themes of loneliness of the protagonist who has to perform his job regardless of his personal goals and aspirations. WALL-E strives to make sense of his actions and escape from solitary existence.

In this respect, Bakes accentuates, “this little robot has the desire to understand what living is all about while people who truly have the gift of being alive have lost it” (93). Humans gave up saving the environment because of the prevalence of commercialism and consumerism dictating future behavioral patterns.

More importantly, the movie emphasizes the inevitability of the destruction until humans become more aware of the consequences of their passive existence. In addition, lack of dialogues makes the movie more focused on the passiveness and reluctance of the humanity to introduce changes.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “WALL-E”: Dystopian Narrative by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In conclusion, the movie WALL-E exposes dystopian trends of the contemporary society that is engaged into the technological and scientific progress. In particular, the picture incorporates consumerist and environmentalist issues and compares humans with programmed being who are under the influence of consumption culture.

Within this context, the director refers to the machines as to humanized creatures that are still fighting for the welfare of the Earth. Although the movie presents a science-fiction story, it still calls people for actions to preserve the planet for future generation and contribute to the development of new trends of technological and scientific development.

In particular, both machines and humans should fight for the recovery of the Earth from ecological and social destruction. Society, therefore, should get rid of consumerist patterns and become more aware of the consequences of their stereotypic thinking.

Works Cited Baker, Frank. W. “The Future According To Pixar: A Wall-E Study Guide”. Screen Education, 51 (2008): 92-97. Web. EBSCOhost.

Beck, Bernard. “Don’t Make Me Laugh: People Are Funny In WALL-E and Tropic Thunder.” Multicultural Perspectives 11.2 (2009): 90-93. Web. EBSCOhost.

Howey, Ann. “Going Beyond Our Directive: Wall-E and the Limits of Social Commentary.” Jeunesse: Young People, Texts, Cultures 2.1 (2010): 45-70. Web. EBSCOhost.

Poore, Barbara S. “WALL-E and the “Many, Many” Maps: Toward User-Centred Ontologies For The National Map.” Cartographica 45.2 (2010): 113-120. Web. EBSCOhost.

[supanova_question]

Social Media amongst the Student Population Report best essay help

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Introduction

Conclusion

Reference List

Executive Summary This is a formal report about the way students use social media as a common aspect of modern the informational era. The report begins with an introduction of the subject in the given context, with a brief description of the current trends in social media amongst the student population.

There is a detailed summary of various types of socially acceptable media such as Facebook, Twitter, and Google; among other common networking sites that are common among the youth. For the purpose of this report, there is also a discussion of some of the changes that have been observed in the past five years regarding the way students receive information and news.

As it will be observed in this report, there has been a great transformation on the way students receive news and crucial information regarding their studies. This is a clear evidence of how modern technology has contributed at improving students’ lives in various grounds. Finally, there is an overview of economical as well as technological factors that are likely to influence students’ decision to choose a particular manner of consuming media.

Introduction The use of technology through social media sites is increasingly becoming a common trend in the contemporary world. Social media simply refers to all types of media applied in the current world to enable and facilitate social interaction among people. Interaction, networking, and collaboration of humans through social media platforms are perceived to have been facilitated by the current technological advancements.

The use of computers, among other systems of modern technology has dramatically transformed the way people interact with each other. As it would be observed, the use of social media has increasingly become a common practice among students. Constant application of various mobile and web-based programs and applications has for the last few years been effective in helping students navigate various networking sites of their choice, either for fun or for academic-related objectives.

With the presence of numerous social media platforms, students have been able to search, discover, and exchange new information, thus improving their social life and understanding on different aspects surrounding their lives. Social media has really played a key role in creating a more collaborative culture among students, especially those in higher educational institutions. In fact, the benefits associated with the usage of social media by students are immense than the disadvantages.

Social media platforms serve as a primary means of interaction for the current generation. Some of the common trends in social media amongst the student population include increased socialization, communication, and knowledge on various topics of concern (Margaryan, Littlejohn

[supanova_question]

A Critical Discussion of Wal-Mart’s Superordinate Goals Case Study best college essay help: best college essay help

This session focuses on illuminating Wal-Mart’s superordinate goals and how they fit with the dimensions of staff, skills, structure, strategy, style and systems. The session concludes by providing recommendations that could be employed to enhance organizational performance.

Extant literature describes superordinate goals as “…the set of values or aspirations which underpin what a company stands for and believes in” (Watson, 1983 p. 8).

In this view, it can be acknowledged that Wal-Mart’s superordinate goals include: 1) providing value and service to customers by availing quality products at low prices, 2) corporate dedication to a successful partnership among the organization’s associates (employees), vendor partners, ownership and management, and 3) commitment to respect the communities which host its stores and distribution centers (Griffin

[supanova_question]

Nazi Germany college essay help: college essay help

The Nazi movement is a revolutionary movement that was associated with the mass murder of Jews and Communists in an attempt to restore the reputation of Germany at the international level. The movement gained momentum during the 1929 global depression. The suppression of Jews was meant to bring cultural and national renewal to the Germans.

The appointment of Adolf Hitler as Chancellor marked the beginning of the Holocaust. Hitler soon established a dictatorship regime that abolished all political parties and alienated Germany from the rest of the world. The Nazis’ ability to wield power and carry out the Holocaust is attributed to three factors.

To begin with, Hitler had some very enthusiastic supporters. Secondly, the many people who seemed less enthusiastic got along with the conditions of Hitler’s regime. The third factor is because few people had both the desire and courage to resist the Nazis.

The Nazi regime under the leadership of Hitler was very powerful because of the enthusiastic supporters of the Nazi party. Some of Hitler’s supporters were not even aware of the gravity of their actions at that time. The Holocaust was fueled by the Anti-Semitic propaganda that was being spread by Hitler’s supporters.

The Anti-Semitic propaganda was meant to create a rift between the Jews and the native Germans. The propaganda was able to manipulate the Nazi party supporters to burn the Kronenberg synagogue in 1938 (Mayer 20). After the disbandment of all political parties by Hitler’s regime, all politicians were forced to join the Nazi party or completely retire from politics.

The supporters who were behind the Anti-Semitic movement were commonly known as the SA policemen (Mayer 20). Karl-Heinz Schwenke is a notable Anti-Semite crusader during the Hitler regime.

Schwenke started spreading the Anti-Semite propaganda even before the Nazi party took over power from the previous government. Schwenke believed that the high inflation rate that was being experienced in German at that time was caused by Jews and this had led to him losing his business (Mayer 115).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Schwenke was an ardent supporter of the Nazi party, and he demonstrated this when he blatantly refused to support his son’s marriage because the bride’s father was not a member of the Nazi party (Mayer 21). Bruno Lipstky is another fanatic Hitler supporter who insisted on marching with the Nazi party members although he was a disable (Mayer 120).

The Anti-Semitic propaganda spread by supporters of the Nazi party was based on economic concepts and not necessarily political. Klingelholfer, who was a loyal party member claimed that the polices of the Nazi party were not racial but entirely political (Mayer 132).

The Hitler regime and its supporters always rejoiced at the suffering of Jews. Johann Kessler, one of Hitler’s loyal supporters rejoiced when a synagogue where Jews used to worship was completely burned down. Kessler considered this as the type of change that Hitler and his Nazi party had promised to them (Mayer 34).

The Hitler regime was not that popular during its initial stages but many Germans had no choice but get along with it. Germany suffered an economic depression after the First World War which led to many people losing their jobs while young people were unable to access meaningful employment.

This difficult economic situation led to Gustavo Schwenke becoming an SA policeman for money in the year 1932 (Mayer 114). Heinrich Wedekind was a baker who joined the Nazi party in order to maintain a relationship with his wife and two children. The other reason why Wedekind joined the Nazi party was to save his bakery business at that time. Wedekind later found a perfect excuse to quite the SA movement (Mayer 37).

Herr Damm is another opportunistic supporter who joined the Nazi party in order to get a job. Damm became a member of the Nazi party in order to in order to secure a job in the party offices (Mayer 90). Since it was risky to engage in open rebellion against Hitler’s regime, some people joined the Nazi party because they had no other option.

Rosenthal, a bank director then is an example of this group of people (Mayer 79). Another party member who was forced to join the Nazi party is Willy Hofmeister. Hofmester was a police officer who was forced to join the party by the Police Chief (Mayer 99). Other people later joined the Nazi party because everybody was doing it.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Nazi Germany

[supanova_question]

The accuracy concerning various dimensions of Culture Essay college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Communication and culture

Hofstede’s national cultural model

Trompenaars’ cultural business model

Conclusion

References

Introduction There is increased interaction among people from all around the globe compared to the twentieth century. Globalization has, In turn, influenced the culture and well-being of people in their communities. This paper examines the various dimensions of culture and the influence of cross culture communications on global business operations.

Communication and culture According to Hofstede (2001), there are about 400 definitions of the word “culture”, though they can be summed up to imply the way a group of people lives. This is noticeable from their values, rituals and heroes. As such, culture refers to the wide spectrum that entails learned human behavior patterns that are independent of a person’s nature and personality. Graph 1 shows the uniqueness of culture.

Graph1: distinctiveness of individuals’ mental training (Hofstede, 2001)

Consequently, one needs to examine an individual’s behavior against their culture, in order to comprehend their communication patterns. This is because one’s mindset is defined by the cultural practices of an individual.

According to Agar (1994), most researchers look at culture in a national level with little regard of the numerous cultural differences due to ethnicity within a nation. While people from one country may portray similarities in various cultural traits, an in depth analysis shows that individuals have diverse ideals and standards depending on their customs and location within a country.

Hofstede’s national cultural model Geert Hofstede came up with four dimensional national culture models following his study of employees at IBM. His data was based on over 11000 questionnaires that he obtained from 72 countries and 20 languages. The research by Hofstede was based on the analysis of the role of employee values in attaining the company objectives.

The first dimension by Hofstede was Power distance (PD), which showed the scope of equal power distribution within a society. In addition to this, the Power distance Index analyzes the level to which the society accepts this distribution of power. In his evaluation of organizations and institutions as society units, Hofstede realized that it was inevitable to have a significant level of disparity of the individuals’ talents and knowhow.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Consequently, Hofstede categorized power distance in a cultural setting as either low or high. A high power distance is indicated by communication flow from top to bottom and more reward for higher authority levels.

The second dimension examines the degree to which individuals of a culture choose to operate as individuals or collectively as a group. This dimension of individualism versus collectivism identifies the degree to which the interests of an individual outweigh the interests of the group.

In his third dimension, Hofstede looks at the values of a society with regard to masculinity and femininity.

According to Hofstede (2001), masculine cultures are dependent on the men providing for, and protecting the family, whereby the society focuses on income, acknowledgment and courage. On the other hand, feminine cultures hold the expectations of both men and women equally, whereby the society focuses on favorable working relationships, collaboration and employment security.

The fourth dimension, uncertainty avoidance, evaluates the scope to which individuals are at ease with controlled circumstances, based on their customs. Societies that seek high uncertainty avoidance are more comfortable with rules and regulations that administer the rights and duties of both employers and employees.

Hofstede added a fifth dimension, “long-term versus short-term orientation, which looks at cultural attitudes towards the past, present and future” (Hofstede, 2001). According to Hofstede, individuals in a low Long Term Orientation culture are less likely to value tradition, compared to others. Hence, they are more open to change as long as they are fully involved in the innovation project (Straub, Loch, Evaristo, Karahanna,

[supanova_question]

Migration of Women, Its Causes and Benefits Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Migration, Causes and its effects on women

Conclusion

Introduction Migration is the movement of people from one place to another place with an aim of establishing a permanent location where they can settle. It usually occurs where people move from one country to another. It can occur either voluntarily of may be involuntary. Migration dates backs to the early days of human life.

There are different scales under which human migration can occur. These include global level, country levels, and one which occurs within the country. It can also occur on the basis of the movement from the rural to urban areas. This happens, in most cases, when people move to urban centers in search for employment opportunities.

In this research, we attempt to find out whether women have to lose or gain from the process of migration. In achieving this objective, the research tries to compare the gains that women may get from migration to those of men. Besides, the research attempts to achieve the same objective based on the causes of migration, ease of women’s migration, their social and economic statuses.

Migration, Causes and its effects on women There are many reasons that make people migrate. These reasons can be categorized into push and pull reasons. One of the major causes of migration is poverty. Men have control of property more than women. This is one crucial difference between women and men migration.

Moving from one country to another may help in alleviating poverty, improving education levels and health status of the migrants. All these problems mostly affect women. This means that, women will benefit from migration if the movement will be accompanied by these gains.

Shortage of food and existence war in the country of origin is the other causes of migration. People move from one place to another to look for food and also for safety. Natural calamities like floods and earthquake make people migrate from one place to another. Search for favorable climatic or weather conditions, and secure food supply cause people to migrate. Migration of women is more difficult compared to that of men.

A Man is more mobile than a woman because a woman mostly has to move with her children. Men easily move away from their homes, mostly to look for employment so that they can support their families. Women migration is complex because of the existence of children. Mostly they migrate with their children, and this increases the number of low income earners in the host country.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When Women migrate, they mostly join the low income earners group in the host country. In many instances, immigrants earn low income. Economically, women suffer most when they migrate from their home countries. This happens mostly when women migrate to look for jobs or because of insecurity in their home countries. They may get exposed to sexual or criminal exploitation especially if they fail to get jobs in the host countries.

Women end up engaging in illegal and immoral businesses so that they can earn a living. These businesses may include commercial sex activities or slavery. This is not the same case with men because they can engage in different income earning jobs that women cannot handle.

However, women stand to benefit socially when they migrate to escape from exploitative marriages. They also run away from many gender-based problems like abusive and violent husbands, and gender inequality in their home countries.

Conclusion In short, comparing men to women, men stand to gain more than women during migration. However, on one side, women stand to benefit socially by escaping from their disappointing marriages. On the other side, there are more dangers they get exposed to when they migrate. Some of these include sexual exploitation and exploitative domestic works. Men are economically and socially mobile, hence not exposed to such risks. This makes them benefit more from migration than men.

[supanova_question]

Adaptation to the Host Society for Immigrants Essay best college essay help

Introduction: Assimilation, ethnic pluralism, and trans-nationalism for immigrants Assimilation refers to a process by which a small group of immigrants join a larger group of immigrants, and become accepted in its culture. The small group even goes further to dominate the culture of the larger group. In recent times, assimilation has changed to ethnic pluralism. Ethnic pluralism arises where immigrants from different racial and ethnic groups live together peacefully.

Trans-nationalism, on the other hand, occurs where immigrants move from one country to another. All these activities and movements between any two countries explain the meaning of trans-nationalism. In this case, the immigrants do not have a permanent settlement in the host country.

There are different kinds of trans-nationalism, which include political, migrant and economic trans-nationalism. Migrant trans-nationalism is the one in which the migrating persons retain the social ties they had with the country of origin. Political trans-nationalism occurs where the immigrants can freely engage in political affairs in both the country of origin and destination.

Economic trans-nationalism occurs where the immigrants can engage in economic matters of the home country as well as those of the destination country. In this case, there are close relations between the immigrants in the home and the host country. They are even in a position to send money in their home country. The immigrants maintain continuous communication with the home country.

Differences and similarities between assimilation, ethnic pluralism, and trans-nationalism for immigrants Assimilation and trans-nationalism differ in some respects. In the case of assimilation, the immigrants dominate the culture of the superior group that assimilates them. In the case of Trans-nationalism, the immigrants do not embrace the culture of the host country, but they engage in some of its political and social affairs.

Ethnic, national, professional, and social class identities are the common types of identity assumed by the immigrants. This is different from assimilation because there are no classes of identity in assimilation and ethnic pluralism. Another notable difference is that, in assimilation, the immigrants lose their identity, and become part of the culture of the host country.

In both ethnic pluralism and trans-nationalism, the immigrants do not lose their identity. Assimilation occurs in a host country, but trans-nationalism occurs across borders of different countries. In assimilation, there are no close ties between the host country and the immigrants.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In ethnic pluralism and trans-nationalism, the ties exist. In some types of assimilation, the immigrants do not become socially and culturally assimilated, and hence they get marginalized.

This is not the case in ethnic pluralism and trans-nationalism. In assimilation, the immigrants become part and parcel socially and in culture. In trans-nationalism, the immigrants can participate freely in politics and economic affairs of the home country.

All these three kinds of immigration have one thing in common. They all refer to the coexistence among immigrants. Trans-nationalism and ethnic pluralism are similar in some ways. In both, immigrants are not restricted from repatriating their wealth to the country of origin.

Conclusion The best way to migrate and become exactly like the citizens of the host country is assimilation. Immigrants should become part and parcel of that country. It promotes integration. When immigrants get assimilated in to the host country, they do not even have to bother to repatriate their wealth to the home country. They become part of the culture of the host country, and they embrace it as their own.

[supanova_question]

Technological Change in Organisations Essay (Critical Writing) essay help

Many organisations carry out technological changes depending on various reasons. These changes are done to improve the quality and quantity of output of the organisations. This paper will critically review various forms of literature that discuss the issue of technological change in organisations and the main reasons why it is done.

The impact of technology on organisational procedures and performance has become very crucial. Many organisations have realised that technological advancements shape performance levels in workers employed by the organisation. The management personnel in the organisation need to ensure that the technological changes that are introduced are managed effectively.

Technological change in a company can only be successful if the existing organisational culture allows for it (Song 2008, p. 203). All the participants in the organisation need to be aware of the benefits of technological change and their role in contributing to technological change. Many organisations have introduced newer technological processes, which have significant impacts on their users.

Technological changes help in improving efficiency and performance levels in the organisation. Employees need to know how they can use these technologies and the results that are likely to be obtained from them. It has become vital for organisations to manage the changes in work procedures that are brought about by technology in the direction of improving job satisfaction.

The issue of organisational culture is a critical component that managers should consider before any technological change is adopted. Song (2008) states that the chosen technological change needs to suit the work environment or the organisation it is chosen for.

The management of the organisation must examine the technical and social factors that affect its personnel to understand the right approach that should be used when introducing new technology.

Technology has a big influence on the methods that are used by a company in the manufacture of its goods as well as the quality of production. It is a crucial issue, which impacts on organisational performance and output. Technology is constantly changing and consequently, organisations need to understand how these changes can add quality to their internal and external operations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Dauda and Akingbade (2011, p. 33) argue that technology consists of innovative systems, knowledge and skills that are used by the organisation to improve performance.

Technological change is the approach taken by organisations to use revolutionary technical skills and processes, which are important in helping firms to meet their objectives. There is a connection between labour, technology and expenditure. Technological changes cannot be effective if these three aspects of organisational performance are not linked properly.

The management should not overstate technological changes at the expense of their existing personnel. Some labour intensive industries require both skilled manpower and advanced equipment for work processes to be effective. Organisations should not alienate their workers when introducing new technology as this can result in strained labour relations and industrial action.

Technological change should not be seen as a workers’ replacement but as a complementary aid meant to improve levels of performance and achieve positive results (Dauda

[supanova_question]

Saint Tropez History and Tourizm Report (Assessment) college application essay help: college application essay help

Introduction Most countries rely on tourism as their key, foreign exchange earner to promote their balance of trade and payment. Tourism is the practice of moving from one place to another for entertainment, business or relaxation.

Domestic and international tourism are the two main types of tourism practiced all over the world. Domestic tourism involves the movement of people within their national boundaries while international tourism involves travelling to other countries. This essay will focus on Saint Tropez as a favorite tourist destination preferred by many international travelers.

Saint Tropez is a town full of rich histories dating back to the times when conquests were common to determine France rulers. This town was adversely affected during the 14th century although the Genoese families rebuilt it and sought its independency in the 15th century (Stevens 2010).

The next years were punctuated by frequent attacks from the Spanish and Turks who were determined to take over and run its operations. This town was predominantly occupied by port activities including, trading, shipbuilding and fishing. However, tourism activities were less since the frequent attacks discouraged international travelers from touring the town.

However, the beginning of the 20th century saw Saint Tropez rejuvenate and made considerable steps in terms of developments as a favorite tourist destination. Even though, this port suffered various setbacks and destruction in 1944 there was a significant comeback in the early 1950’s (Brown 2012).

Fishing and shipping developed significantly and attracted the establishment of the attention of the Bohemian artists from Paris. The establishment of Saint Tropez town as their favorite summer quarters attracted other artists. They transformed the town from a business oriented site to a favorite tourist destination.

One of the key aspects that make this town a favorite tourist destination is its proximity to the Mediterranean Sea. This means that people can access this town from any region of the world. The port makes Saint Tropez town active throughout the year due to the large number of cargo handled by traders.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Trading activities make this town attract investors in other sectors of the economy like hotels, houses, accommodations, restaurants and tour guides (Taber 2006). The port attracts various business investors who in turn make it lively by investing in various activities and establishing businesses.

Even though, this town was originally known for port activities including ship building and transportation of goods in and out of France, its proximity to the sea made it an attractive spot for tourists.

This town enjoys a longer summer time than most French towns and thus attracts locals and foreigners who intend to spend their holidays sunbathing. This town registers a considerable warm weather throughout the year and during summer temperatures rise to 360 Celsius.

This means that the town opens its gates to tourists throughout the year. Most European countries enjoy short summer seasons that do not offer adequate time for relaxation (Burke 2010). Therefore, the warm weather experienced in this town makes it a suitable weather changer for tourists keen on moving away from ice world.

Tourists can visit this town anytime of the year regardless of the world calendar; therefore, making this place welcoming to all who wish to experience warm weather while most of the world is experiencing cold weather.

Saint Tropez town has been secure from any insecurity cases apart from the early invasions during the First World War. However, the administration of this town has ensured all residents and foreigners are protected against any cases of insecurity.

France has never experienced serious civil or political instabilities for a long time since the end of the First World War (Peters 2008). Therefore, this has offered room for local and foreign investors to participate in various activities. In addition, the town has offered friendly environments for foreigners on holiday or business activities.

We will write a custom Assessment on Saint Tropez History and Tourizm specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Drug trafficking has never been an issue in this port and thus the place has flourished and attracted tourists who like social vents without interruptions. France has experienced smooth power plays and transitions that have ensured the whole country enjoys peace and stability.

There are many police officers on patrol to ensure people observe and adhere to the laws as stipulated by the constitution (Kladstrup 2002). This town is accessible to mass markets through a well established transport and system that ensures tourists and locals travel to various destinations with ease.

This town is known all over the world for providing first class yachting services that connect the town with other nearby towns. The sea is probably one of the most exciting ways of going to and from the town. Therefore, there is plenty of room for various sea vessels to enable tourists and locals access the town without delays or vessel breakdowns.

Investors have adopted the latest technology in developing modern vessels that allow tourists to enjoy scenic views while travelling to or from this town. Tourists flock this town during the summer season and the port offers two ferry services that connect this town with other four nearby towns (Saint Maxime, Saint Raphael, Cannes and Nice).

On the other hand, this town is not well served with airports since the nearest airport is fifteen kilometers this town. However, apart from the La Mole airport, other airports are located more than fifty kilometers from this town (Thompson 2012). The town has made use of chartered helicopters that transport people to and from beaches and restaurants.

There are more than fifty helicopter flights each day from the town to other destinations around the town. In addition, there is a well developed road network that enables tourists enjoy chauffer rides around the town and to the nearby scenic places (Brooke 2011).

The rail station has a direct boat connection to Saint Tropez beaches. Boats and buses operate on a full time basis; therefore, tourists do not have to wait for long hours for the boats or buses to arrive.

There is no direct route from various destinations to this town. However, this town has three main routes (RN98, A57 and A8) that join the town with nearby towns. In addition, there are taxi services from almost all airports but these are exclusively preserved for the rich people in the society since they are expensive.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Saint Tropez History and Tourizm by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More During the high season, people experience traffic snarl ups that cause delays (Williams 2011). Most people prefer using scooters, bicycles and walking on foot depending on their locations from the town.

There are various tourist information centers that offer assistance to foreigners and locals who intend to tour the town. The ministry of tourism provides key directions and advice on the nature and laws that govern the behavior of all citizens and foreigners in France (Steves 2011). The information ensures foreigners understand the locals and government laws in order to make their stays safe.

In addition, there are various centers that offer useful information about tourist sites, historical places, nature trails and beaches. Moreover, private hotels offer information in their websites regarding their services and locations (Gauldie 2009). The main tourist attractions include art gallery that contains names and portraits of famous people in the country. One of them is the martyr (Saint Tropez) who was murdered during the civil strife of early eighteenth century.

Several artists like Louis de Funes are commemorated as key actors in the French Comedy. Other attractions include the cannons used during the First World War located on the Cidatel beach. In addition, this town has cinema halls that provide movie goers an excitement they will never forget. There is also a library that offers a variety of readership preferences (Lavagno 2010).

The outdoor activities offer families room for merry making while enjoying their favorite drinks and meals from nearby hotels. There is plenty of space for parking and outdoor activities offered by the expansive land adjacent to the sea.

Saint Tropez’s nightlife in ranked among the most exquisite in the world as it offers a variety of entertainment to revelers and party lovers. This town has bars and restaurants that offer world class lounge services, cabaret dancing, cocktail bars, and night beaches reserved for adults only.

Conclusion Saint Tropez town is one of the fast growing famous tourist destinations that attract people from all countries. This town offers a variety of holiday events that make it attractive to local and foreign tourists. However, the ever increasing number of tourists may supersede the town’s abilities to offer quality services like efficient transport systems.

References Brooke, A. (2011). Frommer’s Provence and the Riviera Day by Day (Frommer’s Day by Day – Pocket). New York, Frommer’s Publishers.

Brown, C. (2012). Browns Guide Boutique Hotels France. New York, CreateSpace Independent Publishing.

Burke, D. (2010). Traveler’s Companion Mediterranean France, 2nd (Traveler’s Companion Series). New York, Globe Pequot.

Gauldie, R. (2009). Top 10 Provence and Cote D’Azur (Eyewitness Top 10 Travel Guide). New York, D.K. Travel Publishing.

Kladstrup, D. (2002). Wine and War: The French, the Nazis, and the Battle for France’s Greatest Treasure. New York, Broadway Publishers.

Lavagno, E. (2010). The Best of France: Paris, Brittany, Castles of Loire and Provence. Garland, VMB Publishers.

Peters, L. (2008). The New Era of France Tourism. New York CreateSpace Independent Publishing.

Stevens, D. (2010). The French Riviera: Nice, Cannes, Antibes, Saint-Tropez, Monaco and other Towns, Festivals, and Artists who Painted the Region. New York, Webster’s Digital Services.

Steves, R. (2011). Rick Steves’ Provence and the French Riviera. California, Avalon Travel Publishing.

Taber, G. (2006). Judgment of Paris: California vs. France and the Historic 1976 Paris Tasting that Revolutionized Wine. New York, Scribner.

Thompson, W. (2012). Deadly Masquerade on the French Riviera. New York CreateSpace.

Williams, N. (2011). Lonely Planet France. , Chicago, Lonely Planet Publishers.

[supanova_question]

Louis Vuitton Moet Hennessy Report argumentative essay help

Introduction The main objective of this report is to analyze the business environment of Louis Vuitton Moet Hennessy, in addition to conducting a market audit. The purpose of the report is to analyse the structure and performance of LVMH. The report shall also provide a brief overview of LVMH. In addition, the company’s SBUs, PESTLE analysis, SWOT analysis, Porter’s 5 Forces, and McKinsey 7S Matrix, shall also be conducted.

Overview of the LVMH LVMH was formed in 1987 when Moet Hennessy merged with Louis Vuitton (Rugman 2005). The French based company operates in different parts of the world and it has over 100,000 employees (LVMH n.d). The company’s largest market share is in the US (26%), followed by Europe (18%), France (16%), and Japan (15%). Latin America and Asia account for 25% of the company’s market share (Rugman 2005).

LVMH enjoys global presence, and this has enabled the company to diversify its market risk. For example, LVMH managed to withstand major financial crises such as the 1998 Asian crisis and the 2007 global financial recession.

Some of the company’s famous brands include Chadon, Moet, Givenchy, Dom Perignon, and Christian Dior (Rugman 2005). Currently, the LVMH enjoys a 15% of the global luxury goods market share. This is a very competitive market with an estimated annual growth rate of10% (Rugman 2005). Some of LVMH’s major competitors include Bulgari, Richemont, and Gucci.

To remain competitive in the market, the company has mainly focused on shared synergies and costs across its dimensional value chain. In the last three financial quarters of 2012, LVMH has recorded an estimated €19.9 billion in revenue. This represents a 22% increase in revenue, compared with the same period last year (LVMH 2012).

Strategic Business Units (SBU) LVMH LVMH operates under five SBUs namely, perfumes and cosmetics, fashion and leather goods, watches and jewelry, wines and spirits, and selective retailing (Reuters 2012). The table below is an illustration of LVMH’s SBUs

Perfumes and Cosmetics Guerlain

Givenchy

Christian Dior

Kenzo

Fashion

[supanova_question]

QUESTION 1 What are the key financial differences among for-profit, not-for-profit, and public healthcare facilities? Your response must be at least 200 words in length. QUESTION 2 Explain h argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

QUESTION 2
Explain how case mix and occupancy rate can be used to help balance the budget of a healthcare facility.
Your response must be at least 200 words in length.
QUESTION 3
Discuss the CMS Quality Initiatives that are underway at this time. Do you support these initiatives? Why, or why not? How do you feel these initiatives will affect patient care?
Your response must be at least 200 words in length.
QUESTION 4
Based upon your learning from this unit, and also from your own experience, what do you consider to be the mostimportant steps that a healthcare administrator should take to ensure the financial stability of his or her medical facility today? In addition, what do you consider to be the most important steps that a healthcare administrator should take to ensure the quality of care received at his or her medical facility today? Be sure to include information regarding the process involved in checking the credentials of physicians and other healthcare providers in the facility.
Your response must be at least 200 words in length.

[supanova_question]

Marketing plan for MAC Cosmetics Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Historical analysis

Industry analysis

Consumer analysis

Competitor analysis

Consumer needs

Product decision

Pricing decisions

Conclusion

Works Cited

Historical analysis Two cosmetic industry players; Frank Toskan, a makeup artist and Frank Angelo, a professional photographer started MAC in 1984. They made their products for professional make up artists who would apply them on photo shoot models or studio actors and actresses.

Therefore, the initial client base consisted of members from the entertainment industry. Through celebrity endorsements, the line grew rapidly and became a product for the high fashion industry.

The two founders used and expanded their business networks to grow their product lines. Many consumers appreciated the longevity and quality of their products. Because of this, MAC enjoyed more celebrity endorsements; artists, such as Pamela Anderson and Debbie Harry, promoted their products in the late 1980s.

In the subsequent decade, 1991, the company formally entered the US market by opening its first New York store. MAC also grew its market by establishing its first European store in Paris, five years later. The company has expanded in a number of other influential countries, including China.

MAC collaborated with various department stores in Canada and the US to distribute their products. However, the organization’s main distribution outlet was its retail stores. Currently, one can find their products in Macy’s or Nordstrom. In 1994, the company sold a substantial portion of its products to Estee Lauder.

In 1998, the latter firm became the full owner of MAC after both founding entrepreneurs left the business. Estee continued with the original product lines but kept diversifying its range. Now one can find MAC stores in various parts of the world. The firm has a niche among professional make-up artists, even though ordinary consumers are fond of their products, as well (Byron B3).

Industry analysis Vertically integrated, multinational organizations currently dominate the US cosmetics industry. Most of them manufacture, distribute and sell their products independently. Acquisition and buy outs are commonplace in this industry. Several of them prefer to create new business lines and streamline their production processes in order to stay ahead.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The dominant players control a large market share because they have well established distribution channels. In fact, distribution is one of the biggest barriers to enter in the industry. A lot of government regulations exist for imported cosmetic products, so smaller firms that plan on going international may experience a lot of difficulties in penetrating new markets.

The cosmetics industry is highly competitive; therefore, new entrants must be willing to create new product lines in order to stay ahead. The need for frequent product endorsements may also hamper some individuals from doing business in the industry.

There is a high degree of rivalry in cosmetics production as evidenced through numerous imitation products. For instance, the natural-product boom started with one organization and spread to other organizations that had to keep up in order to stay ahead. The high number of small and medium-sized cosmetics companies causes larger players to up their stakes and continue innovating (Etsee Lauder 18).

Consumers are highly influential in this industry as their needs often drive product development or research trends. For instance, men no longer think that the application of makeup is unconventional or peculiar; consequently, this has led to the development of many male-oriented products.

Additionally, a number of consumers want to use natural products thus propelling cosmetics manufacturers to avoid synthetic products to meet their needs. Further, some buyers want to use few products on their skin; this has prompted cosmetics suppliers to create multifunctional products.

Suppliers do not have a lot of clout in cosmetics production as they are many. Cosmetics manufacturers rely on chemicals and products that can be found easily. This means that businesses such as MAC can negotiate the price of their products.

Consumer analysis Brand loyalty is one of the principal factors that drive demand for MAC products or cosmetics’ in general. Some individuals may buy a certain brad of cosmetics merely because of the name. Buyers readily identify with MAC products and have maintained a strong relationship with the brand.

We will write a custom Essay on Marketing plan for MAC Cosmetics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In fact, several blogs and websites exist for women who love MAC products. Many of them exclusively focus on MAC even when they have no reason for doing so. In fact, the firm has a cult like following of shoppers who buy all their weekly collections consistently.

On the flipside, this implies that when consumers prefer using a competitor’s brand, then chances are that they will not switch to MAC’s innovations even if they are worth a try (Ahearne, Bhattacharya

[supanova_question]

Immortality of Soul Essay essay help online free

In Plato’s Phaedo, Socrates reflects the events from his life and reveals the most important ideas about the immortality of soul. In particular, the philosopher introduces the theory of separateness of immortal soul from the physical body by using a number of arguments.

In particular, Socrates refers to the analysis of oppositions, introduces recollection theory, and explains the concept of affinity to prove that soul is immortal and it is separate from the physical body.

From the perspective of the Opposites Arguments, if the physical body is mortal and physical, the soul is immortal and, therefore, it should not die. Because the body is subject to death in physical terms, the soul shapes its opposite.

To explain the existence of the opposites, Plato provides the analogy of cold and fire. Thus, in case the cold cannot be destructed and exists separately from fire, the latter can be destroyed by cold. Although the fire is destroyed, the cold will still exist. Similar opposites can be created while exemplifying the charges of magnets. Despite the fact that cold and fire are related to each other in terms of temperature differences.

They form the opposites and, nevertheless, they are linked to each other. At the same time, in case one object does not exist, the other object cannot exist. In this respect, can be said that fire can be identified as the absence of cold and, vice versa, cold personifies absence of fire. While identifying the analogy with body and soul, body cannot exist without soul and soul is the part of a body.

To prove the immortality of soul, it is necessary to refer to the theory of recollection. According to this theory, an individual possesses non-empirical knowledge, which implies that he/she can know something about the surrounding world at birth, but not in the course of living. In other words, people possess knowledge that is obtained as we gain experience about the object and event around use.

The theory, therefore, acknowledges the existence of previous knowledge about everything. The learning process is not associated with gaining knowledge from beyond, but recollecting what an individual is already aware of. The process of recollection is possible through proper questioning and, therefore, everything we know already can be regained.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While considering these assumptions, it is possible to assert that soul existed long before we have been born. What is more importantly, the theory also proves that the soul is immortal and it is capable of repeated reincarnation. Knowledge, therefore, forms the essence of soul eternity.

Each time the soul is incarnated in a new body, the knowledge could be forgotten because of the shock of birth. As a result, an individual perceives the recovery of knowledge as a learning process. The theory of recollection also justifies the existence of objective reality which does not depend on subjective evaluation because the matter of things existing in the world should not depend on the perception of individuals.

Finally, the evidence of existence of the soul can be analyzed from the viewpoint of affinity theory. According to this theory, the immortality is invisible and incorporeal whereas visible things are moral and corporeal. Within these perspectives, our soul is invisible and, therefore, it is immortal whereas our physical body can be seen and, therefore, it is mortal.

Although human bodies are subject to death, souls continue living. Unlike the two arguments discussed above, the affinity theory focuses on the nature of the soul. According to Plato, because the concept of soul is etymologically associated with the word “to breathe”, the philosophy demonstrates that, unlike breath, human soul cannot be blown away.

To shape the analogies under the affinity argument, soul is regarded as the form and it remains stable and unchanged, even when it encounters with the visible forms, such as physical body. When the body and soul are together, the latter controls the body because it is the nature of the soul to control the physical entity. In this respect, the soul can be identified with a divine being that is capable of ruling mortal beings.

Hence, the soul knows different forms owing to its ability to sense the material, although the soul is invisible. The affinity argument justifies the immortality of soul because it premises on the principles of analogies.

In other words, in case the soul knows forms and it is invisible, it can be imperishable. In contrast to the argument of analogy, the affinity concept can be presented as the argument about the nature of things. Therefore, the immortality of soul can be perceived as its function.

We will write a custom Essay on Immortality of Soul specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, there proposed arguments, including opposites theory, theory of recollection, and affinity argument, the soul is immortal and it can exist separately of body.

With regard to the argument, the theory of opposites suits best for justifying the argument. In addition, the principle of analogues also contributes to understanding the concept of duality, which means that the body cannot exist without soul.

[supanova_question]

Health Care as One of the Government’s Responsibilities Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

An average American knows much about the principles of equality stated in the Constitution of the USA. However, do the Americans realize the fact of their being deprived from the right to be equal in relation to all the aspects of the social life with references to the right of receiving the necessary health care?

The Americans are divided into those people who can afford medical insurance because of being employed and those individuals who are unemployed and, as a result, cannot receive the opportunity to be treated according to their needs. The situation is even more controversial when the issue is discussed with references to the constantly increasing rate of unemployment in the country.

Health care should be provided by the Government and should be available for all the citizens without references to their income and social status because the ignorance of this responsibility can lead to the social discrimination, to influencing the people’s welfare negatively, and to increasing the general rate of mortality.

The Government is responsible for all the citizens, but from the perspective of the current situation in the USA, the Government can be discussed as responsible only for the health of those people whose income and status of the employed persons provide them with the opportunity to have insurance.

Thus, the health care becomes the privilege of the wealthy persons, and the principle of equality is not followed directly when the problem of the country’s health care system is discussed.

Why should people pay attention to health care as the Government’s responsibility? The health care is the social problem, and it should be resolved at the governmental level. Ignoring the responsibility to provide the necessary care for all the citizens, the Government indirectly supports the social discrimination based on the fact employers discuss the potential workers from the point of having or giving insurance.

Moreover, unemployed persons have to suffer without the necessary medical help because of their ‘lower statuses’ associated with the absence of insurance (Armstrong, Fischer, and Parsa-Parsi).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The support of the current health care system based on insurance is the support of decreasing the general level of the people’s welfare. Health care system should be funded at the federal level in order to avoid the situation when poor or unemployed people become the victims of the health care system which is rather inhumane to them in relation to providing the necessary treatment.

The US health care system is one of the best systems in the world, and the Americans’ health should be also good, but the real statistics include the data on all the categories of the population, and the trends are not positive (Shi).

The rate of mortality is closely connected with the issue of funding the health care system in the country. The US health care system provides the population with the innovative technologies in treating diseases in spite of the level of their severity. Nevertheless, the rate of mortality is comparably high (Shi and Singh).

The problem is in the fact those people who have no insurance also have no possibilities to receive the necessary medical care. Sick people without insurance are deprived of the chance to be treated carefully, and their untreated diseases are often the cause for death.

Discussing different controversial points, people often concentrate on the role of wealth and status in the society. Health is traditionally discussed as the major wealth in the life of any person.

Nevertheless, the examination of the US health care system which is based on insurance makes people think that insurance and status of the employed person are more significant aspects than health care. Furthermore, arguments of those people who accentuate the disadvantages of funding health care are irrelevant with focusing on the examples of Great Britain and Canada.

Works Cited Armstrong, Elizabeth, Martin Fischer, and Ramin Parsa-Parsi. The Health Care Dilemma: A Comparison of Health Care Systems in Three European Countries and the US. USA: World Scientific Publishing Company, 2011. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Health Care as One of the Government’s Responsibilities specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Shi, Leiyu. Essentials of the U.S. Health Care System. USA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2004. Print.

Shi, Leiyu, and Douglas Singh. Delivering Health Care in America: A Systems Approach. USA: Jones

[supanova_question]

African Diasporic Culture across the World: Influences, Transformations and Interactions Essay writing essay help

Introduction: African Diasporas Around the World In the modern world, the process of culture fusion is no longer a miracle – due to immigration and emigration, cultures and national traits are mixed in the most unbelievable fashion, which leads to the development of completely new traditions.

However, it is important to keep in mind that it is not only the cultural backdrop of the new location that shapes the specifics of a certain diaspora, but also the attitudes which the local people shape towards the newcomers, as well as the political aspects of the given state.

Because of years of colonialism and racial capitalism, the African diasporic culture has shaped a rather vague idea of collective consciousness and deviated considerably from its racial identity.

Racial Capitalism and African Diasporic Culture: Against Prejudices There is no doubt that retaining the national specifics in the atmosphere of a completely different culture and absolutely different traditions is incredibly hard. No matter how strong and solid the diaspora is, it has to take into account the ideas and principles of the country which the given diaspora is located in, which affects the recognition of the national identity.

Thus, even with all the integrity that the African diasporas have, they have been affected by the principles of the states which they were located in.

The given phenomenon presumably has had a negative effect on the African diasporas, according to Clarke and Thomas: “global capitalism and its development models are destroying cultural diversity and creating a monoculture,’ – they “identify ‘Americanization’ as solely imperialist and nonnegotiable” (Clarke and Thomas 346).

Still, it has to be admitted that the above-mentioned idea of the impact which capitalistic postulates have had on the culture in the African diasporas is rather radical; as Clarke and Thomas explain, capitalism had both the negative and the positive effect on the diasporas.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, in Jamaican African diasporas, capitalism enhanced the promotion of the Black culture: “This emphasis on capitalism and consumerism has, more recently, been linked to the elevation of a racial identity” (Clarke and Thomas 348).

As an economic strategy which the African people are not quite familiar with, capitalism has offered the Western model of development with no regard as to the specifics of African culture whatsoever. At the same time, however, capitalism has opened a range of new opportunities for the African diasporas, which means that the latter can possibly make efficient use of some of the Western ideas.

Colonialism and African Diasporic Culture: The Question of Power Knowing the true reasons behind immigration shape one’s personality a lot. There is no secret to anyone that the African population left the continent being enslaved. As a result, two adages pervade the collective consciousness of the older African Diasporas of transatlantic slavery and colonialism respectively: ‘We are here because you brought us here’ and ‘We are here because you were there’ (223).

However, it is worth mentioning that the given attitude, as Clarke and Thomas explain, are rather the features of the older members of diasporas, while the younger ones are less concerned about the colonialist issues.

It is essential to mention, though, that not all African diasporas were subdued to the impact of colonialism; some of the diasporas were located in the places where the colonial aspect was far not that obvious and left less tangible effect on shaping the African diasporic mood.

As Clarke and Thomas emphasize, “The Dominican dreamscape emphasized national autonomy in the face of dwindling Spanish colonialism, continuing Haitian economic and political dominance, and rising American imperialism” (59).

Thus, it can be considered that there are certain differences among the world African diasporas in term of colonial moods and the way in which the Africans responded to the colonial attitudes. In most cases, however, it was the impact of the dominating state that shaped the African immigrants and their attitude towards their own country and the state which they lived in.

We will write a custom Essay on African Diasporic Culture across the World: Influences, Transformations and Interactions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More African Diasporic Culture vs. the Western Culture: The Conflict That Never Dies Speaking of the scale to which the other cultures affect the African diasporas, one must mention that for a group of people who are to live in a foreign country and follow its traditions and rules, the African people have actually managed to keep their ones quite successfully, at the same time fully integrating into the foreign community.

Despite the fact that the foreign culture has been dominating over the African communities for a considerable amount of time, there is still enough of national spirit among the members of diasporas; in certain cases, the Africans even managed to reinforce their cultural specific, as Clarke and Thomas claim: “a modern plantation economy, political and economic subordination to a centralized state, and a stable national identity (a “we” diametrically opposed to “them”)” (Clarke and Thomas 60) allowed to create more or less stable diaspora within the Dominican Republic.

However, the process of assimilation is irreversible, which means that, sooner or later, there will be little left of the African lifestyle among the members of the diasporas unless they become social reclusive. It seems that, to keep their integrity intact, African diasporas, like the diasporas of any other nations have to give up any attempts to become a part of the dominating culture.

Since both suggestions are practically impossible, a reasonable compromise can be suggested. While African diasporas retain their traditions and national values, they can accept some of the Western ideas in order to match the economical and financial development of the latter.

Conclusion: Across the Boundaries of Space and Time Hence, it can be considered that the African diasporas should be given credit for at least trying to keep their national identity. However, it cannot be argued that, after years spent under the aegis of other states and cultures, it has developed several specific features which cannot be associated with the traditional African culture anymore.

On the one hand, constantly keeping in mind the question “Why we are here?”, the African diasporas were trying to retain their national identity; on the other hand, the impact of the Western culture is slowly taking its toll on the African diasporas.

In addition, the impact which capitalism has had on the national identity of the members of the African diasporas all over the world cannot be described as positive either; with the focus on what is more marketable than what is linked to the national identity more, the African diasporas are facing the threat of losing their national identities completely.

Rethinking their values and the outside influence, African diasporas can possibly retain their national culture and identity.

Not sure if you can write a paper on African Diasporic Culture across the World: Influences, Transformations and Interactions by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Clarke, K Maxine, and Deborah A. Thomas. Globalization and Race: Transformation in the Cultural Production of Blackness. Durham: Duke University Press. 2006. Print.

[supanova_question]

Report Critique of Business Research Paper college essay help online

The recent economic downtown, which had its epicenter in the United States and spilled to other countries across the world, saw an unprecedented deterioration in the way organizations conducted business and sustained their competitive efficiencies. Many companies in the United States, including the Lehman Brothers and Bear Sterns, were forced to file for bankruptcy due to the aftershocks of the recession.

The report by Gulluce and Parent (2011), titled “Survival of the Smallest: Examining the Impact of Recession on Small Business”, attempts to provide informative insights into how Canadian small and middle-sized enterprises (SMEs) survived the recession. The following is a critique of the report.

Undoubtedly, there are many things that a management scholar would validate after reading the report, but equally perplexing is the fact that some information seems to lack solid management underpinning. The authors have done well to bring into the limelight the strategies that were being used by small businesses in Canada to deal with the recession; however, they fail to account for the impact of the recession on these businesses.

For instance, it is agreeable how the authors suggest various strategies that were being employed by SMEs during the recession (e.g., cutting costs, venturing into new markets, and making personal sacrifices such as holiday cancellations and downgrading own salary), but details about why these strategies were being implemented are rather scanty.

A comprehensive analysis of the impacts of the recession (e.g., fall of consumption, rise of unemployment, increased number of bankrupt businesses, credit reductions and mounting social distress), in my view, would have led to a more salient understanding of the strategies that were being used by small companies in Canada to deal with the recession.

Overall, the report is not only insightful but also informative, and demonstrates how SME business owners take drastic measures such as scaling down their own salaries, taking more debt, venturing into new markets and creating new job opportunities to ensure their businesses thrive during challenging and uncertain times.

Other important strategies include turning to local markets to capture new markets, product diversification in Canada and abroad, recruiting new customers, reducing prices, increasing advertising/promotional efforts through expanding online presence, decreasing the number of employees, and freezing the wages and salaries of owners as well as employees (Gulluce

[supanova_question]

How Canadian SMEs Survived the Economic Recession-A Critical Review Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction The article ‘SMEs Tell Us How They Survived the Recession’ was published by the Canadian Federation of Independent Business (2012) on its website. The publisher attempts to present how SMEs can use certain strategies to survive harsh economic periods.

The Canadian Federation of Independent Business (CFIB) is an independent organization driven by entrepreneurs, and aims at giving first-hand information to the business and general community in Canada. The purpose of this paper is to review the article by CFIB and make recommendations on its possible use in business management.

Analysis I tend seek to agree with the research findings in this article based on a number of reasons. First, in this article, the report developed by CFIB in 2012 tends to reflect on how organizations can use certain strategies to achieve growth even when an economic crisis is looming. This is quite agreeable because some business owners are likely to see an advantage of making growth when their colleagues are suffering from the crisis.

Although there are few such opportunities, the article by CFIB indicates the actual happening during the period. In fact, it is worth agreeing with these findings because some SMEs actually reported growth during the hard economic times.

In addition, the article is credible in making it clear that even the business owners who saw opportunities to improve their growth were also affected by the same problems affecting their colleagues, including the rate of taxation and premiums.

Moreover, I agree with the results based on the study design the CFIB carried out in this case. In fact, the design is empirical, and reports the findings of a research it had carried out to examine the different strategies that SMEs used during the economic recession as a survival tactic.

Titled ‘Survival of the Smallest’, the research interviewed its members on a nationwide level, obtaining more than 300 comments. In this report, four categories of survival tactics were identified: the behavior of the business owner, employment and staffing strategies, sales and marketing strategies and focus on new and existing markets.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Secondly, I find the information in this article useful for a number of reasons. For instance, it is worth noting that economic recessions have negative impacts on business organizations. For example, the article clarifies that most of the respondents in the study indicated that the recession in Canada was actually a painful moment for most business organizations, including the SMEs.

The information on the strategies that SMEs’ owners used is useful in making policies in business and economics. For instance, I find it useful to note that the study shows how most SMEs’ owners tried several methods to bear with the economic pains than did their employees. In addition, although owners took careful steps in cutting business and personal expenses, some saw the opportunity to explore and utilize their markets.

In fact, this category took many business owners, with both positive and negative impacts on individual businesses. According to CFIB (2012), the answers given by the respondents in the study indicated both positive and negative impacts of falling into the category of business owners who ‘saw new opportunities’ in their respective markets.

According to the study, the group that indicated positive results on falling in this category is the ‘growth oriented enterprises’. It was realized that its members requested the same things that other members of the study had requested.

For instance, they complained of taxation and increase in premium in all the three levels of the Canadian government. They indicated that even though they had obtained some benefits during the economic recession, they were equally hurt by the increasing premiums and level of taxation on SMEs.

This article is recommendable for use by SMEs’ owners in Canada and other parts of the world for a number of reasons. First, it indicates that although an economic crisis hurts almost all business organizations, taking the advantage of the situation to note new business ideas in the wake of the crisis could protect a business organization from economic harm.

The article informs SMEs’ owners that even during the crisis, it is worth looking at the business environment to determine certain opportunities that others cannot see and use them as a business survival tactic. In fact, reading this article would provide make the SMEs’ owners realize that even though SMEs are the hardest hit when an economic crisis occurs, they may also survive just as corporations do.

We will write a custom Research Paper on How Canadian SMEs Survived the Economic Recession-A Critical Review specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, the article seeks to enlighten owners of SMEs in dealing with economic crisis. In addition, the article provides empirical evidence based on the reports given by the respondents.

SME owners should note that even if the increased in premiums and the effect of government taxation affects all the businesses, looking for opportunities in the business environment could protect them from a crisis, despite the nature and size of their organizations. Therefore, I would recommend business owners and managers to read this article in detail in an attempt to protect themselves from future economic crisis.

Reference Canadian Federation of Independent Business. (2012). SMEs tell us how they survived the recession. Retrieved from https://www.cfib-fcei.ca/en/research-economic-analysis

[supanova_question]

Scientific Knowledge: Is It Dangerous for Politics to Define Science? Essay best essay help

Science and politics have never seemed to have much in common. While the former follows a clearly established theory and operates with verified facts, the latter uses the existing facts to its advantage and often manipulates ideas to make itself look favorable. Whereas science is a thing in itself, politics is often out there for the public.

In contrast to science, where the outcomes can usually be easily predicted, in politics, the results of certain moves can be quite unexpected; the list goes on. Therefore, it seems hardly possible that the two could have the slightest impact on each other.

Despite the fact that a number of educational issues concern the political aspects of people’s lives, defining science must not be the concern of politics, otherwise the quality of education will drop considerably.

To give credit where it belongs, one must admit that at certain points of the state’s development, politics and education can cross. For example, in political science or history, where students learn the way in which states were formed and political issues were handled, it is often quite hard to offer an objective opinion on the past events (McLelland).

Since the students need to evaluate certain events, they need specific political ideas to use as a basis for their judgments. For example, the democratic principles can be used to assess the era when racism was not confronted. Therefore, without certain political ideas as a background for people’s judgments, it is hardly possible to address a certain political event in the past.

However, when the impact that politicians have on educational process is pushed to its limit, the equality of education is likely to decrease; and, which is even more threatening, the veracity of the offered information is likely to be reduced. The conflict between the educational establishments and the political leaders who meddle in the educational system is mostly caused by the discrepancies between the two opponents concerning the educational goals.

While politicians aim at shaping the educational system according to the current trends in politics and encourage learning the subjects that are currently considered essential, teachers are preoccupied with providing the students with vast knowledge and training the skills that will further help the students learn the chosen subjects even deeper.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To demonstrate the differences in the approach that the authorities in education and political leaders follow in their policy of education restructuring, the recent conflict concerning religion and education is worth analyzing.

According to Strauss, the recent law in Tennessee is likely to set education back several decades. Considered controversial and unverified, the theory of evolution, as well as cloning and a number of other scientific issues are temporarily extracted from the school curriculum, which raises the concern for the quality of education.

At the given point, the controversy between how the law is worded and the way it is implemented becomes obvious – it is officially announced that “The law encourages teachers to ‘present the scientific strengths and scientific weaknesses of existing scientific theories covered in the course being taught’” (Strauss para.2), which sounds innocent enough.

However, in practice, the given statement has driven to the following results: “the only examples given in the bill of ‘controversial’ theories are ‘biological evolution, the chemical origins of life, global warming, and human cloning’” (Strauss para.2). The given situation is a clear-cut example of how bad the intrusion of political leaders into the educational system can backfire and what drastic results it can lead.

Left without such issues as the theory of evolution, global warming and cloning to learn, the students will not be able to learn about the variety of the existing species (Johnson para.1), the impact that people have on nature (Feldman, Maibach, Rosen-Renour and Leiserowitz 2) and the opportunities that organs cloning can offer for the people who need organ transplantation (Cibelli, Lanza and West 1).

Therefore, the students will lack a huge amount of information that a well-educated person is supposed to know and that provide the foil for the further educational process. Hence, it is rather questionable that the students who will be taught according to the new standards will be able to obtain further knowledge and have opportunities for high education, not to mention the fact that these students will not have the basic common knowledge about the issues in question.

Even though there is the time for innovations and restructuring of the educational system, it still seems that changes should not be forced onto educational system under the aegis of a current political regime. While politicians can offer reasonable suggestions that can make the educational system even more flexible and accessible for the students from all walks of life, when it comes to defining science, politicians should not interfere.

We will write a custom Essay on Scientific Knowledge: Is It Dangerous for Politics to Define Science? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Professional issues in any field must be tackled by the true experts, which means that educational concerns must be solved by the members of the Educational Department, the school board, etc. Once allowing competent people handle the complexities, one can be certain that educational problems will be gone soon.

Works Cited Cibelli, Jose B., Robert P. Lanza and Michael D. West 2001. The First Human Cloned Embryo. Web.

Feldman, Lauren, Edward W. Maibach, Connie Rosen-Renour and Anthony Leiserowitz. “Climate on Cable: The Nature and Impact of Global Warming Coverage on Fox News, CNN, and MSNBC.” The International Journal of Press/Politics 20.10 (2011): 1-29. Web.

Johnson, William. “The Theory of Evolution Revisited.” Quodlibet Journal 3.2 (2001): n.p. Web.

McLelland, Christine W. The Nature of Science and the Scientific Method. Web.

Strauss, Valerie, 2012. Tennessee Back to the Future with New Anti-Evolution Law. Web.

[supanova_question]

The UAE Islands Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Over the last few decades, the issue of the rightful owner of the three islands in the Gulf region has been a highly contested matter between Iran and the United Arab Emirates. The three islands : Greater Tunbs, Abu Musa, and Lesser Tunbs amounts to lesser than 26 KM2 of scrub and sand. However, the islands’ proximity to strategic points in the Persian Gulf has always accorded them a big economical significance.

It should be observed here that this great importance directly associated with the location of the islands does not only extend to Iran and the Emirates, who are said to be the largest claimers of the land, but far beyond.

The ownership disputes over the islands dates back over one hundred years ago, and this has consistently drawn the attention and concern of the international communities onto the matter. The three islands belonging to the UAE were taken years ago by the Iranian government and the conflict began to rise again due to Iranian pressures.

This big concern about the islands was more of a regional matter than anything else, and in that case, there were unsuccessful interventions by the British forces in the late 1960s, to ensure that both Iran and the UAE had equal control over one of the islands that was of great economical importance.

This memorandum of understanding granted the two states equal share on the economic outcomes of Abu Musa Island. However, none of the two countries could renounce full claims on the island’s sovereignty. These new developments had occurred as a result of Britain’s announcement in the late 1960s that it intended to vacate the region by the end of the year 1971.

The Iranian government had highly disputed this decision claiming their own historic rights on the highlands, and this would eventually see their troops forcibly gain control over the islands towards the end of 1971 (Mobley, 2003).

However, Iran was obliged to abandon this misguided claim following a referendum that was conducted on Bahrain under the supervision of the United Nations, but this did not stop them from having full control and authority over the islands.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More According to the claims that were initially presented by Tehran, the three islands were long managed by Iran, before they were later seized by the British government within the Gulf in the nineteenth century (Salman Al-Saud, 2004). The Emirates, however, came up with claims that Arab leaders had ruled the islands for over two hundred years.

Iran had tried to raise an ownership claim to the three islands in the early 1920s, but this move was quickly opposed by the British, who had a different perspective on the matter. This would ensure that the control of the three islands was retained by Sharjah. The latest tensions on the matter escalated in the early 1990s, when the Emirates accused the Iranians of violating the agreement that gave them an equal authority over the Abu Musa Island.

These claims were laid open in the year 2008 when it was reported that Iranians had already established maritime offices in the island, thus prompting serious protests from the Emirate’s side.

This increased domination of the island by the Iranians appeared to give power to one side, while exploiting the other, as opposed to the requirements of the memorandum of understanding which had been signed by the two states in 1971, with regard to the control of the Abu Musa.

As it would be observed, this prolonged dispute between Iran and the UAE with regard to the true ownership of the three islands has recently necessitated a number of events and incidents.

For instance, the controversial and provocative issue has facilitated a wise initiative by the UAE in the recent years, to resolve the matter through negotiations reached upon Iran and themselves, the International Court of Justice or any other suitable forum that involves the international attention. UAE’s government has constantly reaffirmed their claim to ownership of the islands, condemning Iran’s military occupation and domination on the matter (Kozhanov, 2011).

In this context, the UAE has gone ahead to offer a number of suggestions on the most appropriate options that should be followed in addressing the matter.

We will write a custom Essay on The UAE Islands specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The first option would be engagement in direct bilateral talks between the two major rivals on the matter; Iran and the UAE. This approach will address the question of sovereignty of the three Islands, among other key issues surrounding the Iranian occupation and control of the islands. There are no any preconditions that have been set by the UAE against the Iranian government, as far as this approach is concerned.

The other option that had been proposed by the UAE towards a permanent resolution on the issue was to seek the advice and judgment of international parties such as the International Court of Justice in The Hague. Even though the UAE had expressed their willingness to accept any ruling that might be reached upon by the ICJ regarding the sovereignty of the islands, Iranians have completely rejected anything to do with any of these two options.

The above specific phenomenon had triggered new suspicions from the Iranian government who saw this as a plan to rob them of their sovereignty over the disputed islands (Anthony, 2010). In this regard, Iranians would later on accept to engage into bilateral talks on the matter, but on a number of conditions.

The officials representing Iran on the matter had clearly expressed their complete unwillingness to tackle the question of the three islands’ sovereignty. According to the officials, their main concern on the talks would be aimed at resolving the misunderstandings between them and the UAE on this progressive issue.

Even though the International law has been clear on its enforcements that sovereignty cannot be achieved through the way of coercion or military invasion, the presence of Iranians on the three islands continues to raise many questions. This, however, explains the reason as to why the Iranians have been unwilling to allow the involvement of the ICJ in this matter.

This is simply because the international court is likely to rule in favor of the Emirates as far this issue is concerned, owing to the weakness stand of the Iranians in terms of the international law on this specific matter.

However, Iran has over the years used this as their vantage point from which they can have full control over the matter, since the international court can only exercise their jurisdiction power on the matter where the involved parties have given in to referral of a dispute, and that is something which they have refused completely.

The above approach by the UAE was intended to effectively improve the conflicted relationship between Iran and the UAE, but it has only succeeded at raising unanticipated tensions on whether there would ever be a permanent resolution on this matter, which has threatened to tear the interests of the two countries apart.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The UAE Islands by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is contained in the interests of each of the two rivals to have a sovereign power and authority over the three islands, which are certain to generate significant economical benefits, among other attractive alternatives. Moreover, the outcomes of this move by the UAE would be even more of a serious conflict between the two nations, than an attempt to bring them together through a permanent resolution, as it was previously intended.

UAE’s efforts to regain control of the islands from the Iranians through whichever means has subsequently been considered to be a move which is likely to severe more the diplomatic ties between this two adversaries and other gulf states (Nuruzzaman, 2012). This may also result to violence and attacks, considering the much-spread word that Iran has established a strong military presence on the disputed islands as a way of securing them from the Emirates.

This security detail, as it will be observed, constitutes of both anti-ship and anti-aircraft missiles to ensure maximum safety measures of the islands from any point of attack. This exaggerated security concern is a clear indication that the Iranian government is not ready to surrender the sovereignty of the islands to any other state, and that they are willing to act in any possible manner against any plans to relieve them of this significant right.

Some of the major consequences that are likely to sprout from this phenomenon would include poor social fabrics and disintegration of the close and multifaceted trade relationships that have existed between Iran and the UAE. As it would be observed, Iran-UAE economic ties have risen steadily over the past ten years.

This however, would be expected, considering the fact that the Emirates have emerged as Iran’s key connection and access to global economy in the recent past, as trade sanctions against Iran continue to take serious effect on their economy (Ulrichsen, 2009). No wonder, major global traders such as China and Japan have started conducting bilateral economic activities with Iran, through the UAE.

The flourishing Iran-UAE economical relationships, however, may be short-lived following Iran’s failure to honor the UAE’S decision on the islands’ issue. In the events arising from this phenomenon, there have been consistent concerns that the Iranian government poses the biggest threat to Emirate’s political, economical, and even national security.

It leaves no doubt that this dispute over the islands has been the most persistent cause of bilateral tension between the two Gulf States, as it is observed from this essay. As a matter of fact, the islands’ issue remains a constant irritant in the social and economical relationships of the two countries, thus undermining any development efforts applied by the countries.

Even though this constant threat over the islands has never escalated to the levels of extreme violence, there have been increased concerns of late that these tensions may eventually result to serious bilateral tensions or conflicts. In order to contain the impact of all these potential consequences, Iranians should stop seeing themselves as an imperial power, and try to cooperate more intensively on the UAE’s idea of peaceful negotiations to resolve this big issue which has threatened to tear them apart.

References Anthony, J. (2010). 5 Strategic dynamics of Iran-GCC relations. Industrialization in the Gulf: A Socioeconomic Revolution, 78(8), 28-35.

Kozhanov, N. (2011). US Economic Sanctions against Iran: Undermined by External Factors. Middle East Policy, 18(3), 144-160.

Mobley, R. (2003). The Tunbs and Abu Musa Islands: Britain’s Perspective. The Middle East Journal, 17(6), 627-645.

Nuruzzaman, M. (2012). Conflicts between Iran and the Gulf Arab States: An Economic Evaluation. Strategic Analysis, 36(12), 542-553.

Salman Al-Saud, F. (2004). Iran, Saudi Arabia and the Gulf: Power Politics in Transition. United Kingdom: IB Tauris.

Ulrichsen, K. (2009). Internal and external security in the Arab Gulf states. Middle East Policy, 16(2), 39-58.

[supanova_question]

Printed Newspapers in US Report (Assessment) best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Target Market

Reasons for the Decline

Recommendation to Marketers

Best Foreign Country

Product Segmentation and Positioning In UK

References

Introduction Newspaper readership in the United States is on a steady decline. Since 1990, the print media has been recording dwindling numbers in terms of advertising, revenues, and number of newspapers printed (Pew Research Center 2012). On the other hand, the online content continues to record massive uptake in the whole country. Does this indicate that printed newspapers may become obsolete?

This paper looks at the characteristics of the target market that could be the reason, highlights the author’s reasons to believe that this product is declining in appeal, makes recommendations, and discusses a turnaround strategy.

Target Market Printed newspapers target any adult past the age of 15 years. Majority of the population in United States fall under this category. When a person purchases a newspaper, at least one other person is assumed to have read the paper. Most newspapers subscriptions are for the family and offices.

It is crucial to note that most people do not read printed newspapers now. The target market for the prints has massively embraced online content. Most of the media giants now compete with online powerhouses such as Google for this target market. The youth aged between 13 and 45 have shifted their interest to online content leaving a shallow and rigid market for printed newspapers.

The take up of technology especially at the start of the 21st century has prompted continued decline in anything associated with a printed newspaper. This includes revenue, readership, circulation, and advertising (Pew Research Center 2012).

Another viable market is people who seek to seal deals such as land, auctions, and those who seek business information. Although it is a small market, printed newspapers may also focus on the 65 and above age bracket. These people are still conservative and stuck to the traditional newspaper.

Reasons for the Decline Generally, the reason why newspapers continue to decline in United States is a shift towards online content. People find it more conducive to engage an online subscription of a newspaper, which is cheap and leads to more information. Newspapers are rigid in that they limit your ability to look for more information while reading.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While reading an online content, a person may open other links that lead to previous stories or bring about facts. Additionally, most people have access to information instantly online. However, there are stories that are more incisive when someone reads them from a newspaper than reading online, for example, investigative reporting.

From a demographic perspective, a majority of the United States population is aged between 13 and 45 (US Department of Commerce 2012). This group has developed or been born in a technology age. People aged above that have reported a frequent usage of a print newspaper.

However, they are an insignificant part of the target market. Sociologists have described this generation as ‘instant’. One major flipside about a newspaper that affects this generation is that it has the culpability to lag behind by at least 8 hours. This only compounds the problem.

Online giants such as Google provide easily available information at any time. Media houses have diversified to other avenues, which present cutthroat competition to print newspapers. Social media is another contributor to the declining era of newspapers. Almost every adult has reported to check his or her social media accounts at least 2 times in a day (Pew Research Center 2012).

Although information on the internet may not be verified, many people use it to spread news, which is reported in newspapers more than 8 hours later. Additionally, majority of media houses of all kind have social media accounts where they report events as they happen through use of live streams and instant updates.

It is important to note that there is no any variance in the tendencies displayed by the target market across ethnic lines (Pew Research Center 2012).

Recommendation to Marketers Marketers of this product need to be creative in selling its remaining appeals. First, it is imperative to have good credibility. This is because the current customer has many options. A sniff of incredibility may render a newspaper obsolete.

We will write a custom Assessment on Printed Newspapers in US specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More They should also inform the consumers that it is only in a newspaper that the traditional investigative reports can be reported more incisively. It may also be essential to have two editions in a day. Additionally, Sunday editions sell more in almost every market than any other edition. A marketer should make this the highlight of the week.

Second, the media houses need to stop selling newspapers. Many people believe that it is less costly to have an online subscription. Even in the traditional set up it was rare for an individual to pay for news (Pew Research Center 2012). Hence, media houses in the newspaper print business need to concentrate on other revenue generating options such as advertising and selling media spaces.

They will have a more credible appeal to customers since they will tout the massive and free circulation. However, to do this the newspaper must be popular. Otherwise it may risk been labeled a hoax by people who view free things as such.

Lastly, considering the continuing trend where majority of the populace has shifted to online content, it is imperative that these newspapers have online editions.

These editions should be free and the media house should concentrate on selling advertising spaces. While doing this, it is also crucial to ascertain what percentage of the market requires a printed newspaper and adequately make it available (Pew Research Center 2012).

Best Foreign Country The United Kingdom is the best country to market a newspaper. With a population of just over 60 million, the country’s 15 years and above population is slightly over 50 million. The country sells over 15 million dailies in a day. Considering that at least two people read one newspaper, this shows good penetration.

Britons love newspapers and have the habit of reading it in the morning traffic and in the evening at home. There are more than 10 national dailies and close to 70 regional dailies (Central Intelligence Agency 2012). This shows how big a market the United Kingdom is for a newspaper.

Britons believe in media and its power can be manifested in entirely different contexts. This is a very interesting market to tout a printed newspaper to a consumer. The internet penetration is quite high with two in every three individuals deemed to use internet on a daily basis.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Printed Newspapers in US by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The country has a fetish for weekend editions. In addition, United Kingdom records 2 times more newspaper sales during the weekend compared to weekdays (Central Intelligence Agency 2012).

Product Segmentation and Positioning In UK To sell this product effectively in the new country, it is imperative to have appropriate marketing tools. Segmentation clearly demarcates the market into groups to sell a product to the right consumers. In as much as Britons, generally, love newspapers it is imperative to give them the right content.

For example, newspapers that report incisive stories about corruption, government misdeeds, and social issues report better bottom lines than the rest. Additionally, business oriented newspapers are popular in UK as opposed to political affiliated ones. Britons read morning and evening editions at almost equal measure.

To sell effectively, a newspaper needs to have both editions to reduce the time lag associated with newspaper reporting. A newspaper needs to be recognized to be meaningful. Most UK national dailies are sold unlike some regional dailies that are available free (Central Intelligence Agency 2012).

This shows that most UK citizens do not mind purchasing a newspaper. It is also imperative to report credible stories. This is despite the fact that propaganda and investigative corruption stories are popular with UK citizens. Many UK nationals buy more than one newspaper at a time.

This is despite the deep internet penetration that is pegged at around two thirds of the country. Many nationals also subscribe to the online editions and this makes it imperative to have an online edition too. Weekend editions are quite popular in UK.

They sell at least 2 times more newspapers in the country during weekends as compared to other days. At the weekend, many Britons purchase more one newspaper. This is a perfect time to have the most interesting stories, investigative reports, and documentaries. Matching the right occasion with the mood will make ensure the newspaper records high sales (Central Intelligence Agency 2012).

References Central Intelligence Agency. (2012). CIA World Fact Book. Web.

Pew Research Center. (2012). State of the News Media 2012. Web.

US Department of Commerce. (2012). United States Census: Information and Communications. Web.

[supanova_question]

Impact of Globalization on the American Worker Essay college application essay help

The world is quickly becoming so integrated that it is difficult to think of any nation in absolute isolation. Gone are the days when people from one region would think of themselves as unique, and plan for their activities without putting people from other areas in mind. Nowadays, it is quite easy for people to have investments in different continents and still be able to regularly follow them up.

On the same note, the need for people to increase market for their products has led to foreign adventures, which have advanced interrelations in the world. As a result, globalization has inevitably become part of the world and any step that is taken by people should have this in mind.

Globalization has not only led to advancement in technology and increased volumes of trade, but has also had both positive and negative effects on people. It should be noted that American workers are among people who have experienced first hand effects of Globalization.

Globalization is a term that is used to refer to the linkages between countries. For the most part, it focuses on reduction of barriers of trade not only among neighboring countries, but also among countries all over the world.

Moreover, globalization is used to refer to the economic inter-dependency that has emerged among countries, where countries depend on one another for demand and supply of both raw materials and finished products (Waldinger and Michael 29).

Globalization involves free movement of goods and services across borders, movement of information and technology from one country to another, and exchange of culture resulting to specialization and comparative advantage. It should be noted that the definition of globalization also includes political interdependency that has lately increased in the world (Schaeffer 79).

Globalization has had a lot of positive effects to the American worker. To begin with, the volume of trade has been increasing over the years since countries agreed to open their boundaries to international markets. Countries have increased demand for goods and services forcing firms to increase their production, thereby increasing employment opportunities (Vallas, William and Amy 211).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the same note, due to reduced trade barriers many firms have invested in America. These firms have increased employment opportunities in America which has made it easy for the American worker to get employed.

Similarly, foreign direct investment has led to increased competition for labor in America. In this regard, the American worker has been able to bargain for improved payment and this has led to increased average earnings. In addition, companies are constantly searching for ways of improving their products so that they can stand a chance of competing favorably.

As a result, this has led to increased research by firms resulting to advanced technology (Schaeffer 103). The advancement in technology has reduced the work load to be accomplished by workers besides easing workers’ tasks.

In addition, globalization has led to increased flow of information and increased awareness. Therefore, concerns about working conditions and safety of workplaces for employees of various companies have increased. Consequently, many companies have had to change working conditions for their employees, especially in regions where terms of employment as well as working conditions were bad.

American employees have therefore gained immensely due to globalization. Furthermore, there has been an increase in employment opportunities because one can search for employment even in foreign countries, or in the foreign firms that invest in the local economy (Vallas, William and Amy 121).

On the same note, foreign firms have always had to employ people from different cultural backgrounds. Therefore, employee training is necessary so as to enhance good co-existence. The American worker has been on the receiving end as their knowledge has constantly been improving through regular training.

Besides the positive impacts that globalization has had on the American worker, there are some negative ones as well. First and foremost, companies have been hiring even from foreign countries, which has led to migration of skilled workers from developing countries to developed countries.

We will write a custom Essay on Impact of Globalization on the American Worker specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This exodus is attributed to the availability of high wages and better working conditions in developed countries, especially America (Waldinger and Michael 81). This has led to increased competition for employment opportunities in the American economy. As a result, it has become a bit difficult for American professionals to secure employment.

On the same note, globalization has led to increased immigration into the United States of America. As a result, labor supply has been in excess compared to demand. Consequently, the immigrants have taken up the low-skill job opportunities which would have been allocated to the local people (Schaeffer 115).

Additionally, the influx of the immigrants has reduced the average wage rate that low-skill jobs attract, because immigrants are ready to work for low wages.

Globalization has also increased the ability of firms from developed countries to access cheaper labor from developing countries through outsourcing. Outsourcing refers to the process of contracting another firm to perform certain functions which were being performed internally.

The aims of outsourcing are to gain competitive advantage, increase efficiency in execution of duties and reduce cost of production. Some firms go to the extent of transferring the whole department to the outsourced firm, including the employees. As a result, many firms have reduced the number of employees from developed countries and increased their outsourcing, mostly from emerging markets.

Consequently, developed countries have found themselves in a mess as employment is shifting to emerging markets, while employment rates are declining in their economies due to high labor costs (Waldinger and Michael 235). In this regard, the American workers have found themselves it the predicament of loosing employment opportunities to people from emerging markets.

Furthermore, globalization has led to increased entry of goods into the American market. Consequently, aggregate demand for local American commodities has reduced which has compelled producers to scale down their operations.

Among the steps that firms take while reducing their output include reducing their labor requirements. Unfortunately, this basically means that employment opportunities are reduced leading to increased unemployment rates in America (Vallas, William and Amy 94).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Impact of Globalization on the American Worker by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Globalization has led to increased efficiency thus enhancing competitive advantage. Information technology is an inevitable component which pushes globalization and should be handled with care. However, it should be noted that the American worker has really enjoyed the fruits of globalization, starting from increased job opportunities to increased training.

Regrettably, globalization has negative effects too, and these should be taken into consideration. It is unfortunate that these negative effects may end up being detrimental to world economies if not adequately addressed. As a result, it is paramount for a nation to weigh the advantages and disadvantages of any action related to globalization and take necessary steps to protect the economy.

Works Cited Schaeffer, Robert K. Understanding Globalization: The Social Consequences of Political, Economic and Environmental Change. Lanham: Rowman

[supanova_question]

Extranet and B2B E-Commerce for Business Report college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Executive Summary Top Breadz, a Sydney-based industrial bread and pastry manufacturer assigned our team to investigate how Business–to–Business (B2B) e-commerce solutions might benefit the company to reach its goals, namely, to increase sales by the retail outlets, to increase revenues by entering new markets or increasing market share, and to reduce operating costs.

In regards to these objectives, our proposed B2B e-commerce solution is the design and implementation of a B2B extranet portal for Top Breadz. The extranet solution includes a secure, easy-to-use order management portal to enable partners, suppliers and buyers manage their dealings with the company more efficiently and less costly and collaborative tools to share customer information with partners.

Undertaking the project will benefit Top Breadz by improving its bottom-line efficiency via cutting costs and time of the expenditure and revenue cycles. This not only reduces operating expenditures but also gives the company an edge over its competitors. Having a unified system for all partners also facilitates new market development or market penetration.

The risks to be considered by the Top Breadz team studying the solution are the following:

Retail partners might not possess the proper or compatible Information Technology (IT) background to gain advantage of Top Breadz’s new system.

Taking into account the lack of any legacy systems, and consequently, lack of experience in IT at Top Breadz, implementing a B2B e-commerce platform requires a fundamental shift within the business processes, which might prove to be troublesome and result in early faults.

For the same reason, defining the exact scope of the project is unsure since the requirements are not clear in terms of scalability and future development.

Initial capital outlay is substantial, especially compared to the cost savings only to be realized on the long-term.

The proposed system is perfectly capable of delivering the features that will help Top Breadz reach its goals. We therefore, recommend introducing the new B2B extranet system.

Introduction Business to Business (B2B) e-commerce is becoming an increasingly important method of conducting buying and selling processes. One of the prominent lessons that have emerged from company experiences is the recognition of the significant role that extranets play in B2B e-commerce operations.

Among other things, this paper provides a discussion on how the use of a B2B e-commerce extranet, which has been proposed for Top Breadz, can improve the company’s performance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Description and Explanation of the IT Innovation The information technology services required for e-commerce are Internet, intranets, and extranets. An extranet may be defined as a secure network that uses Internet and Web technologies to connect two or more intranets of business partners, thus enabling business to business communications to take place effectively (Kallioranta

[supanova_question]

Do Non-Human Animals Have Rights? Essay college essay help online

Non-human creatures do not have rights. A right gets defined as a valid claim that must come from a moral agent, under laws that direct both the claimant and defendants (Cohen 91). Animals cannot be said to have rights since the idea of rights is inherently human, and its foundations relate to the concept of a moral world.

Humans must deal with animals in a fair way, similar to how a chair cannot be said to have a dream. Besides, saying that animals have rights confuses groupings as this places them in a moral group that is only relevant to human beings.

Again, animals do not have rights as God made them subordinate to human beings. This notion gets support from the Bible. In the time of creation, man became created last while other animals became created earlier. God then gave men control over all other creatures (Regan par. 34). We can interpret this to mean that human beings have rights over animals.

We can also argue that animals do not have rights, similar to human beings, because their moral stance is totally different. Contrary to the way animals feed on each other human beings behave differently. A lion may kill a zebra and no one will say that the lion does not have the right to kill the zebra, because this is how it obtains its food.

This demonstrates that rights represent the greatest moral result. Besides, animals such as lions and zebras are amoral, which means that morality does not apply to them, and their acts can never be termed as wrong. Thus, no rights exist in the world of animals.

While it is vital for researchers to practice humanity when handling animals, we cannot say that human beings violate their rights, since the idea of rights is not relevant to their situations. For instance, Nazi doctors used the Jews as subjects to advance their research in medicine some years ago. It is clear that this was not a moral approach as the Jews had rights that required respect.

Several people think that animals have rights similar to those of the Jews, which involve protection against participation in medical research. While these people consider animals to have rights, they fail to remember that human beings also have rights that surpass those of animals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, the United States reported over 50,000 polio related cases and almost 3, 000 polio related deaths in 1952 (Cohen 92). People became frightened due to this ailment, and the government called for polio vaccination among all citizens two years later. Presently, cases of polio are rare.

What we need to remember here is that the polio vaccine could only be established through experimentation with animals. Malaria is also a killer disease that most researchers think that should have a vaccine. While several vaccines have undergone investigation, none of them has emerged successful after trial with animals. This raises the ethical question on whether we need to protect children or animals.

Medical experiments may have adverse effects when carried out using human beings, considering that they are only trials. Using children to test vaccine is awkward and results in death.

Thus, we use rats and monkeys as this is the only available option. Vaccines must undergo tests, and such tests could be extremely dangerous when carried out using human beings as subjects. Thus, we do not have any other way of testing these vaccines apart from using animals.

Defenders of human rights insist that animals have rights just like human children. These defenders term the act of medical scientists as morally wrong. However, they fail to recognize that unless animals get killed, medical scientists cannot advance most significant areas in medicine (Frey 97).

Also, defenders of animal rights fail to recognize that animals do not have moral duties, similar to human beings. While we may consider some acts of human beings as crimes, this does not apply to animals. This is because criminal acts become determined by the moral state of mind of the offender.

Similar to how an insane person cannot be said to have committed a crime, cows and rats cannot be said to commit crimes. This is because all these do not recognize moral duties that guide behaviors or consequences that follow certain actions.

We will write a custom Essay on Do Non-Human Animals Have Rights? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In other words, animals cannot be incriminated as they do not have a moral state of mind that could be violated by other humans. Besides, animals do not have free will, which all moral agents must have. This becomes explained by the fact that they do not have control over their pathological impulses, which makes them lack control over their actions.

Hence, animals are not moral agents, and human beings do not have direct duties towards animals because they can only have such duties towards moral agents. This supports the thesis of this study that non-human creatures do not have rights.

Works Cited Cohen, Carl. “Do Animals Have Rights?” Ethics and Behaviour. 7.2 (1997): 91-102. Web.

Frey, Reagan. “Interests and Rights: The Case against Animals.” Journal of Medical Ethics. 7.2 (1981): 95–102. Web.

Regan, Tom. Christianity and Animal Rights: The Challenge and Promise. n.d. Web. .

[supanova_question]

Cognitive, Socio, and the Behaviorist Theory Term Paper essay help

Introduction Child development refers to changes that take place in human beings from childbirth to adolescent stage, involving emotional, biological, as well as biological transformations, while progressing from a stage of dependence to independence (Kail, 2011). Blades et al. (2011) points out that a meaningful and satisfactory life is a product of competence in two major areas.

These include the capacity to develop persevering interpersonal associations and the ability to be productive. It is expected that by early adulthood, children should have attained the ability to develop relationships that are stable, mutually supportive, as well as cooperative with fellow human beings. The developmental features that lead to positive results in people are manifest in 10-12 years of age (Blades et al., 2011).

Many theories have been postulated to explain the process of child development, and this paper seeks to tackle three major theories: Cognitive, socio health and behaviorist theory. Theories on development provide an understanding on how children grow and how they acquire knowledge. These theories can be handy in making decisions and understanding of the strategies to promote the development of a child (Blades et al., 2011).

Cognitive Theory This theory seeks to explain how one’s thoughts and perceptions develop, and how these thoughts affect the way one understands and interacts with the surrounding. Generally, the cognitive theory explains that children build up skills and abilities in a predictable series. Jean Piaget first postulated the cognitive theory in the 1980s.

Cognitive development involves distinct stages: Qualitative change holds that children of varied ages think in varied ways. The other stage is broad applicability, which argues that thoughts at each particular stage encompass topic and content areas.

Thirdly, there is the brief transition stage, which states that there is no substantial necessity to have higher-stage transitions. The invariant sequence stage argues that at all times, the series of stages in human beings are constant (Sternberg

[supanova_question]

GCC International Relations Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Dominant theoretical frameworks within International Relations

Major security threats facing GCC states

Factors influencing security in GCC states

Government Interventions in GCC member states

References

Introduction Theoretical view represents a set of thinking focused towards scientific or scholarly inquiry widely recognized and accepted within particular discipline. Therefore, global politics can well be analyzed through the study of theories in international relations. Study based on international domain can be understood through underlying principles of realist, liberal as well as radical traditions.

Realism and liberalism present some of the most dominant theories in International Relations. Classical thinking usually focuses on the positive outcome on such prospects of peace, cooperation as well as human progression. On the contrary, idealism focuses on prospects surrounding human nature as well as possibilities (Sasley, 2011).

Dominant theoretical frameworks within International Relations Realism is one of the dominant theoretical frameworks that focuses on the existing propensity applicable in resolving conflict between states. The theory was discovered to be dominant theoretical tradition during the Cold War (Sasley, 2011). The theory largely exposes international affairs as self-seeking struggle for power amongst states and is known to generally focus on the positive prospects which can be utilized in the process of eliminating conflict and major squabbles (Sasley, 2011).

The theory is outlined by powerful principles and explanations for various domains within international relations such as war and imperialism amongst other international phenomena. Classical realists believed in the fact that states had the domineering character comparable to that of human beings. Such innate desire makes some states to consider themselves superior based on resources as well as political affiliations.

This contributes to wars amongst nations since classical virtues and balance-of-power system seemed difficult to adopt in some nations. However, the neorealist theory focused majorly on consequences of international system rather than human nature (Sasley, 2011).

Liberalism encompassed several liberal thought which argued based on principles of economic interdependence. This was viewed as major channel which would be utilized to discourage states from applying forceful actions against each other. On the other hand, democracy was one of the key determinants of world peace based on the comparison on affairs between democratic and authoritarian states.

Selfish behaviors emanating from states could easily be dealt with through International agencies; this is since various states are made to forego immediate gains for long-term benefits based on lasting cooperation. Liberal theories focused on the fact that cooperation was more pervasive compared to defensive principles of realism (Sasley, 2011).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The issue on international security amongst GCC member states needs to consider various approaches capable of providing lasting peaceful co-existence. Economic empowerment emerged as one of the reliable approaches which could be utilized to ensure stability within countries in accordance to Liberalism approach (Abdulla, 1994).

Future economic growth within the GCC member states should be used as center stage for peaceful coexistence. There is a need for GCC member states to encourage adoption of holistic approach towards solution of various internal conflicts. Economic levels within the region have been largely affected by lack of accommodative agreements since each state seems to be independent.

The current economic status of the GCC countries calls for policymakers and business leaders to generate ideas capable of withstanding the volatile situation surrounding the region. There is a need of adopting principles of economic interdependence for the purposes of providing the region with required policies, knowledge, skills as well as capabilities of trading favorable within the global market.

There are several government intervention programs which the policymakers should adopt for the purposes of attaining intended results. Such measures include reinforcement of strategies capable of combating problems within regional workforce, upgrading existing relationships between governments and external agencies. Such measures enable development of important institutions capable of bridging existing gaps between GCC states (Shimko, 2009).

For the purposes of dealing with conflicts within the region, GCC governments and policymakers should adopt and implement comprehensive democratic programs capable of providing quality research and evaluation programs capable of developing of professional skills within the region. This can be made possible through organization of seminars and workshops aimed at developing comprehensive GCC diplomatic intelligence.

There is a need for comprehensive establishment of relationships with foreign agencies with the ability of upgrading quality of education system by incorporating cost-effective measures. The nature of regions resources, basically oil resources, contributes towards the region’s crucial economic as well as social changes.

These could be clearly seen during the economic boom of between 1970s and early 1980s. And, at the same time, economic recession of late 1980s and 1990s. The sharp increase in the global oil prices in the early 1980s made these countries to recycle windfall oil gains through the lenient welfare system characterized by generosity, and tremendous public investment which focused on infrastructure, utilities as well as basic industries.

We will write a custom Essay on GCC International Relations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In order to cope with these policies, the GCC governments performed the role of first employment resort which consequently led to overcrowding within the public sector as well as increased government expenditures on salary issues. The move made the GCC governments to encourage citizens to join the public service sectors of government through giving them attractive pension as well as social allowances for their respective families.

The social contract structures led to convergence of more than 85% of the native workers within the public employment hence resulting into underemployment. The issue on social contract and its benefits created a society largely influenced by leisure patterns hence increase on the returns towards leisure since people worked less hours but spent much time on vacations.

This made the GCC countries pursue open border policies which welcomed foreign workers; this ensured sufficient supply of labor at competitive wages at all skill levels. However, wages earned by the natives were higher than those of foreign workers at comparable skills.

The countries of the GCC faced unique challenges originating from the fact that the oil resource that they largely depended upon was exhaustible, volatile and at the same time uncertain. The negative effects on the oil market and the economic catastrophe of the 1990s as well as regional conflicts reduced the rate of growth to a large extent within the GCC countries creating strain within the labour markets.

These effects led to budget deficits within the GCC countries leading to retrench of several social programs which ultimately created large loopholes within the employment sector since the governments were later unable to provide sufficient employment opportunities to the public (International Monetary Fund, 2001).

The issue of unemployment can as well be dealt with through collaboration between governments, business and industry. Focus and development of people’s skills and talents makes companies benefit much. Public and private companies should invest much of their resources in developing skills since the ultimate result is endless dividends.

There is an opportunity for policy makers to utilize the presence of expatriates by utilizing their skills in teaching various industries such as carpentry, building and construction. The tradesmen can be utilized to superbly mentor many national apprentices.

The governments can utilize policies which encourages hiring of skilled foreign craftsmen capable of teaching the same skills to the unemployed. Companies dealing with such programs can coordinate well with the government by exchanging their employees with government financial compensation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on GCC International Relations by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More GCC member states should treat training as an investment; they should design programs capable of increasing students’ chances to employment in the corporate world by aligning the nature of the courses with industry standards. Similar program yielded results in the countries India and Singapore where they utilized Infosys program to connect campus students with industries in the marketplace.

Such programs play important role in developing GCC human capital since it helps in decreasing the level of skill gap and increase the level of youth’s participation within the marketplace.

Major security threats facing GCC states One of the security threats facing GCC countries is the intensifying nature of Iran’s nuclear project. Such security dilemmas focuse on some of the crucial aspects found within international politics. There exists what is referred to as classical security dilemma where allocation of resources by governments to programs focused on security issues is never mandatory.

On the same note, the other security dilemma is referred to as alliance dilemma where management of relations amongst state allies and adversaries are done simultaneously. At the same time, majority of the regimes within Persian Gulf indulges in trade-off as a result of over-reliance on protection and policies from foreign countries.

Additionally, there is a profound dilemma amongst Gulf States when it comes to making choices between creating strategic partnerships with foreign agencies and at the same time protecting the region from global rivalries and disputes.

The GCC states are known to be hesitant especially when it comes to creation and implementation of security-based programs. This has made GCC countries be more independent hence focusing on personal interests. There is no major overarching authority capable of providing regional security for the member states.

Such scenario creates moments of discomfort within other states especially in the event that one state carries out security-producing programs for the purposes of safeguarding self-interests. This is since other states might interpret such actions as acts of hostility and grievous threat to regional peace. Actions taken by some states in arming themselves against weak neighbors stage a threat to peaceful intentions from willing states, hence provoking adoption of risky measures for protection purposes.

For instance, improvement in Saudi Arabia’s military capabilities after the Gulf war prompted other neighboring states to upgrade their armament capabilities. Notably, the rise in armory upgrade within Persian Gulf states especially presence of weapons less useful for territorial defense has created unnecessary tension making GCC regional security more dangerous (Lawson, 2004).

Concerning alliance dilemma approach towards adversaries varies between moderate and inordinate belligerence and conciliation analysis methods. Acts of moderate hostility towards adversary member states may at times ignite allies to focus in the process of undertaking adventurous initiatives capable of polarizing the whole region.

Allies within the region are always more attentive towards hostility from adversaries. However, considerate actions towards adversaries at times lead towards preemptive realignment. The other dilemma concerns balancing stability between external and internal defense (Lawson, 2004).

Factors influencing security in GCC states Some of the major factors influencing security in GCC states include economic status as well as nature of relationship existing amongst the member states, i.e. influence from Iran and Iraq states. GCC appears to be a comprehensive group owing to their close ties to western countries. There is significant degree of mistrust existing between GCC member states and their counterparts Iran and Iraq.

This is based on similar political, economic as well as social systems. Regional turmoil experienced in the Iranian Revolution as well as Iraq-Iran war made security to be one of the most prioritized factors within the GCC region.

However, despite the Arab Gulf states coming together within the framework of multicultural organization, two main antagonists within the region, Iran and Iraq, were left out of the arrangement. This clearly depicts Iran and Iraq, as likely influence on the security deterioration within the region (Lawson, 2004).

Government Interventions in GCC member states The GCC member states should involve themselves in signing agreements capable of providing necessary peaceful relations amongst the member countries. The agreements should incorporate adequate understanding and being considerate of GCC all states irrespective of their military or resource prowess.

There should also be elaborate consideration on foreign individuals and countries capable of granting them right to foreign establishments including freedom of movement and investment within the region. Majority of restrictive rules various states within GCC applied during earlier regimes should be abolished; these include laws on military restrictions and those based on trade such as discriminatory taxes, restrictions on application and utilization of local commercial inputs and licensing schemes.

In dealing with classical security dilemma, there should be elaborate plans by member countries on ways of improving the level of understanding based on technology and adequate management of available resources. This would assist in enhancing the level of resource allocation within various government sectors. At the same time, it is necessary for governments to retain capital and improve the level of competition since this would assist in building local investment plans (Dadush and Falcao, 2011).

In dealing with alliance dilemma, GCC member states should focus on provision of multilateral service liberization. Member countries should enact regulatory changes favorable to all countries both allies and adversaries. These may include privatization based on acceptable policies and agreements devoid of rigid schemes hence capable of incorporating various government intervention measures towards peaceful coexistence (Almezaini, 2011).

The region is recognized as rich in oil and other minerals hence for the sake of upgrading economic standards of member states, various governments should utilize the non-oil sector for the purposes stabilizing resource outflow from various economic sectors. GCC member states should, at the same time, organize workable policies capable of handling issues within public sector since this helps in improving region’s image and at the same time encourage nationals to invest in skills capable of creating impact within the region.

In addition to this, the governments should ensure necessary measures capable of separating internal and external policies capable of ensuring social benefits within the public sector hence making all states beneficiaries of intended policies. The other sensitive issue is the establishment of clear set of rules dealing with duties, fines and penalties which actually reinforces overall cooperation policies amongst GCC states.

References Abdulla, A. (1994). The Gulf Cooperation Council, Journal of Social affairs, 9(35)

Almezaini, K. (2011). The UAE Foreign Policy, Middle East International, 5(44), 1-133

Dadush, U.,

[supanova_question]

Recycling in Campus Essay (Critical Writing) scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

How to improve recycling on campus

How to improve the diversion rate

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Recycling refer to the process that enables unwanted materials to be reclaimed and used in making other products. The objective is to minimize the potential waste of valuable resources. Recycling helps to reduce the waste of useful materials. It also helps in the management of the use of new raw materials. In addition, recycling minimizes the consumption of energy, as well as air and water pollution.

This is achieved through minimizing the use of conventional trash disposal, and reducing emissions from greenhouses. Recycling is a critical aspect of waste management in the modern days. It is the third aspect under the waste management hierarchy of “Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle”.

The benefits of recycling are far reaching. Recycling does not only reduce and minimize waste and use of virgin, natural resources. In addition, it is a critical component in the preservation and conservation of natural resources. It also aids in the sustainable management of the environment (Wilcox, 5-6).

How to improve recycling on campus The benefits of recycling waste in universities go beyond the financial aspects. Universities with effective recycling programs that coincide with environmental conservation programs usually attract research funding, create a good public image or brand, and enjoy good public relations with its clientele and surrounding communities.

Such institutions also attract donations, faculty staff, and students. Institutions of higher learning have to set a precedence that will be followed by business enterprises, community, and government.

Universities have to conduct researches on the possible environmental friendly and economic methods of recycling waste materials. The university needs to allocate significant funds for the purpose of establishing a recycling center within the university. This center will handle all recyclable waste generated within its premises.

As currently constituted, the number of individuals actively involved in the recycling program is very low compared to the total population around the campus. The personnel include 15 students, 6 interns, and campus employees, and they are not sufficient to cover all areas of the campus.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Universities are similar to large companies. They have many departments that produce different kinds of waste. The university should carry out awareness programs to educate students and staff on the need for recycling waste products.

Recycling needs to start from each department where several recycle bins can be placed, each for a certain waste. This will minimize the time spent while sorting out waste to be recycled. Trash cans or bins should be clearly labeled, whether it is for organic, plastic, or metal waste to avoid mixing of recyclable waste (Wilcox, 9-10).

In this modern age of technology, the campus administration should embrace new forms of information communications that do not require the use of papers. Notably, papers form the bulk of waste around the campus precinct. The current use of traditional notice boards that require the use of paper notices pinned on notice boards pose a threat to the cleanliness of the university environment.

After the expiry of the notices or posters, they have to be removed so that new posters and notices can be displayed. This recurrent cycle generates a lot of paper waste around the campus.

The university should consider making use of email and mobile phone short messaging services in order to disseminate information and communicate with the staff and students. Official documents such as memos, newsletters, and notices can be sent to personal email.

It has been noted that social media sites are the newest revolution in information communication technology. In fact, the influence of social media sites has been credited with the recent political revolutions in the Middle East and Arab countries such as Egypt, Libya, Syria, and Tunisia.

Most of the social media sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and YouTube have been interlinked. This means that one can use any one of them to send communication, and there is no need to register with all of them.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Recycling in Campus specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The university should invest in electronic billboards and notice boards such as the ones used in commodity advertising. This will help in reducing the waste paper that is generated around the campus. In the long term, it will significantly reduce the financial cost related to the acquisition of stationery and printing costs.

How to improve the diversion rate When joining the program, the diversion rate was at about 40%. However, at the moment, we can have a boost of a diversion rate of 80%. There is still room for improvement and adequate steps must be taken to ensure that we attain at least 100% diversion rate.

Some of these steps should include the offering of incentives and cash prizes to the departments that are able to collect the highest quantity of recyclable materials from their departments. The university administration can also come up with annual, monthly, and weekly social events that may include collection of waste and trash.

These events can be organized in the form of group, department of faculty competitions. The winning groups can be given incentives such as scholarships for their members or subsidies in relation to other university fees. This will create considerable awareness and motivate people to join and take part in recycling activities.

Conclusion For sustainable conservation and management of the environment for the current and future generation, universities have to take the lead in developing recycling programs. Awareness and knowledge need to be communicated to the society. There is no other better way of achieving this noble objective apart from establishing recycling programs within institutions of higher learning.

Works Cited Wilcox, Charlotte. Recycling and Waste Management. Minneapolis, Minn: Lerner Publication Co., 2007. Print.

[supanova_question]

Aldi’s Micro environment Report argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Introduction Aldi is a German Based multinational company that operates in the discounted stores sector. Having started its operations back in the year 1946, the company has grown to the extent that it controls 8078 stores around the world today. The company entered the United Kingdom in 1990 with the opening of a single store. As of today, the company has managed to open four hundred stores across the United Kingdom.

This growth has put the company amongst one of the most competitive companies in the Hypermarkets, Supermarkets and Superstores sector in the United Kingdom. In the United Kingdom, the company operates within a competitive micro environment. This implies that there are a substantial number of stakeholders in the sector in which Aldi operates (International Markets Bureau 2011).

This paper explores the internal and external environment in which Aldi operates in the United Kingdom. The paper begins by examining the key stakeholders of the company. This is followed by a Porter’s five forces analysis, which helps to capture the macro environment in which the company operates. The paper ends by drawing recommendations from the findings, which can be used by Aldi to gain a competitive position in the United Kingdom.

Key Stakeholder Groups in Aldi’s Micro Environment The government and regulators

Each stakeholder plays a given role in as far as the influence of operation for companies is concerned. The government plays a greater role in setting the business environment. It influences the operation of a given company from the macro and even narrows down to shape the micro environment (Fassin 2009).

The UK government, especially the ministry of trade ensures that comprehensive trade policies are in place in order to steer the operation of business companies. The government ensures that the operational environment is fair for all the companies operating in the HSS. The retail laws are set by the government. Also, the government ensures that labour laws are effectively developed.

The social and environmental policy matters are also coordinated by the government. The government does not have needs per se, but helps in setting standards that are required for effective business operation (International Markets Bureau 2011).

Customers

The other critical stakeholders in the micro environment are the customers (Fassin 2009). Research has pointed out that customers are the most valid stakeholders by any company, including Aldi. The reason behind this is that customers are the main sources of competitive advantage by virtue of their shopping trends and habits.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The growth of Aldi is associated with its ability to provide diverse services, which have enabled them to gain a substantial number of customers over time. Customers have their expectations of the company.

Customers have been demanding for services at discounted prices. This enables the customers to attain goods at lesser costs. This is because of the higher cost of living that has been brought about by the recent tough economic conditions in the country and the world at large (NFU n.d).

Suppliers

Suppliers are vital for companies that deal with the marketing of a wide range of products. Aldi offers a wide range of products. This is one of the positioning factors for the company. The relevance of the suppliers to the company is to ensure sustainable supply of goods to the company (Fassin 2009). Aldi gets its supplies from different manufacturers and processors.

In order to ensure that it maintains its relationship with its customers, a company has to ensure that it maintains a stable relationship with its suppliers so that they can keep supplying quality products. Through the maintenance of a working relationship with their suppliers, the company is able to get a constant supply of products and services.

The main need for suppliers is to ensure that they secure a relationship with the company so that they can maintain the company as one of their chains where they make their supplies.

Employees

According to Fassin (2009), employees are the immediate stakeholders in the company. When it comes to the issue of employees, Aldi focuses on two things: The maintenance of their employees through deployment of best practices in human resource management and the outsourcing of high quality employees from the lumber industry in the United Kingdom. As mentioned earlier, Aldi operates four hundred stores in the United Kingdom.

This points out that the company has a substantial amount of employees in the country. The company has attained most of its managerial employees from the Universities in the United Kingdom. The employees need to be maintained by the company through a better pay and other practices of performance management (NFU n.d).

We will write a custom Report on Aldi’s Micro environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Communities

Communities are another critical group of stakeholders in the company. The company draws its customers from the communities in areas where it has set its retail stores. It is argued that the only way through which a company can establish positive relationships and attachment to the community is by employing best practices in corporate social responsibility (Fassin 2009).

These entail the support of activities and functions within the community. It also involves engagement in sustainable management and environmental conservation. These practices make the communities to be drawn near the company. Aldi has a policy on corporate social responsibility, which helps it to establish and sustain relationships with the communities in the UK (NFU n.d).

Porter’s Five Forces Analysis of Aldi in the UK’s HSS Sector The HSS sector is comprised of a substantial number of operators, thereby making the sector to be quite competitive. This implies that any company that aims at attaining a competitive position in the sector has to make efforts to understand the factors of competitiveness in the sector.

Though still faced with challenges that impede its competitiveness in the UK HSS sector, Aldi has been active in the sector and has managed to gain a substantive amount of customers due its mastery of the macro environment and the subsequent adoption of competitive practices.

Threat of new competition

One thing that is feared by business companies, yet the most critical determiner for their performance is competition. Firms are required to keep monitoring and assessing the developments in the industry in which they operate to gain knowledge on how to adjust their activities in the market. This ensures competitiveness in the market (Draganska

[supanova_question]

A Call to Legalize Abortion Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Introduction Unsafe abortion is a worldwide phenomenon that has existed throughout recorded history, but only a few governments have instituted policy frameworks to address this problem which is seen as a significant cause of maternal mortality and morbidity at a global level (Puri et al., 2012).

However, despite the sustained absence of abortion in serious policy discussion in many countries, it continues to be a highly charged, contentious concern, elevating excessive passions among lay people, as well as politicians, church ministers, and health and rights campaigners (Shah and Ahman, 2009).

Unsafe abortion is characteristically stigmatized and potentially life-threatening both for women seeking the service and for those providing it, but this information is yet to filter through to the 19 million women who undertake unsafe abortions out of the 46 million who perform it annually (Warriner, 2006). Such statistics embolden our belief that abortion should be legalized to safeguard the health, reputation and status of women in need of abortion services.

There exists a multiplicity of reasons as to why governments across the world should consider legislating policy towards the legalization of abortion so that it is practiced in a healthy environment and by qualified health personnel. Some of these reasons are detailed in the ensuing sections.

Consequences of Criminalizing Abortion Extant literature demonstrates that the act of criminalizing abortion has only led to unsafe abortion practices, which are increasingly becoming a significant cause of maternal morbidity and mortality (Puri et al., 2012). Perhaps this line of thought can be illuminated more by borrowing the World Health Organization’s definition of unsafe abortion “…as a procedure for terminating an unwanted pregnancy either by persons lacking the necessary skills or in an environment lacking the minimal medical standards, or both” (Banerjee

[supanova_question]

Butadiene Market Analysis Report scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Central Europe

Middle East

North America

North East Asia

South America

Southeast Asia

Western Europe

Introduction Marketing analysis and forecasting plays an imperative role in planning the operations and growth of any company. The size of the market is greatly influenced by the prevailing economic conditions, demographic factors, competition, culture, religious factors, government legislation, technological changes, social trends, fashion and, ability of customers to purchase products.

In this paper, a detailed analysis of the butadiene company was carried out. Butadiene is used to manufacture tires. The analysis was carried out in seven regions, Central Europe, Middle East, North America, South America, North East Asia, West Europe and South East Asia. The total supply, demand, capacity and the operating rates for the different regions were analyzed.

Central Europe It is expected that the total demand in this region to increase steeply between the years 2012 to 2016 and then stagnate at this level for the next six years. This means that more of their products will be demanded in this region. The average demand of butadiene is 266000 metric tons (2007 to 2012 average).

The total capacity has been increasing with a small margin of about 1% though there was some decline in the year 2010 owing to the demand for more cars and hence the demand for tires increase. It is forecasted that the total capacity will remain constant (at 278000 metric tons) up to 2014 and then increase to 346000 in 2015 followed by a further increase of about 2 % to reach 413000 metric tons. This capacity is expected to stagnate at this level. The total capacity influences the total supply and this same curve will be expected for this region.

Middle East In the Middle East region, the average total demand has been 254000 metric tons in 2007. By the year 2012, the demand had risen to 333000 tons due to increase in purchased cars. The total demand is expected to fall within the forecasting period. It is expected that the total capacity to remain at 382000 tons up to year 2017 and increase steadily to 615000 tons in the same year.

The operating rate has been declining and this trend is expected to continue for the forecasting period due to a reduction in cars purchased. The market will stagnate and this is because the tire manufacture depends on vehicles bought.

North America The total demand for the butadiene in this region reduced from 2432000 to 2432000 metric tons during the 2007 to 2011 period. During 2012, the total demand rose slightly. It is forecasted that the demand will reduce continuously up to year 2016 and then increase rapidly this follows the demand for cars in this region.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Due to the total demand, the total capacity of the plant will remain stagnant up to 2019 and increase slightly for the remaining period. The operating rate is expected to rise from 63.3% to 84.1% from the year 2013 to 2022. This is in response to the total demand fluctuations for this region. The total supply is also expected to rise from 1953000 metric tons in 2013 to 2740000 in the year 2022.

North East Asia In this region, butadiene has large demand due to the number of cars purchased. The total demand increased from 426000 to 5046000 metric tons from the year 2007 to 2012. It is expected that the demand in this region will increase steadily for the forecasting period. To cater for this supply, the total capacity must be increased. The operating rate and the supply are also expected to rise owing to the increased demand.

South America In this region, butadiene is not in high demand as there are cars. From the year 2007, the total demand increased 352000 to 379000 metric tons. It is forecasted that the demand will rise slightly from 379000 tons in 2012 to 530000 metric tons by the year 2022 owing to the increased market share in this region. The total supply is also expected to increase as the demand rises. The plant operating rate will increase to 81% by the year 2022.

Southeast Asia In this region, the products are not in high demand as compared to other regions as seen from the total demand. It is forecasted that the total demand will rise from 563000 tons in the year 2013 to 964000 metric tons by the year 2022 as it gains more customers. The total capacity is expected to increase from 2013 to 2018 and then stagnate at 1065000 metric tons.

The total supply is also expected to rise with increased demand. The operating rate reduced from 98.5% in the year 2007 to 81.7% in the year 2012 and this trend will continue up to 2017 and then rise with a small margin.

Western Europe There is great demand for its product in this region due to the demand for cars. The company expects that the market will increase slightly from 2101000 metric tons to 2243000 metric tons by the year 2022. The total capacity has been constant from the year 2007 to 2012. The company expects that this trend will continue up to 2013 and increase slightly so as to cater for increased demand and supply.

[supanova_question]

American history: A bill of rights and an amendment Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Table of Contents Bill of rights

The disparities between the two concepts

Works Cited

Bill of rights A bill of rights refers to a legal document that stipulates the rights of a given people. It gives strict guidelines on the privileges that citizens possess in a given country. The document aims at ensuring that the rights and privileges of the citizens are fully respected and accorded due attention.

In the United States, rights, demands and privileges of citizens are outlined with the aim of ensuring that equity, fairness and healthy living of the citizens are upheld. The act focuses on ensuring that the rights and privileges of the citizens are not violated (Vile 106-153).

The law can be written or presumed. In most countries, like the United States, a written law can never be repealed or modified to suit other interests that are not in line with the interests of the citizens. A presumed law becomes a normal statute in any given country and can therefore be changed.

According to Schweikart and Allen (2004: 34-135) the act entails a statement or statements of fundamental human rights and privileges that are crucial for the effective existence and wellbeing of people in a country. Legal amendments of a national or federal state are undertaken in a statutory framework.

An amendment refers to a change of the constitution to address new demands or requirements based on the interests of the state or demands of the citizens. An amendment of a constitution can be undertaken in two major ways. One of the ways is through the use of parliamentary initiatives.

Under this provision, an amendment that is proposed must pass through a senate, national assembly or any legal institution. The law upholds that at least two thirds of the members of the mentioned legal frameworks should approve the change.

An amendment may also be undertaken through a popular initiative. In this instance, the change can be done by ensuring that registered voters in the state or country either vote for or against the amendment through a process that is referred to as a referendum. Before a referendum is undertaken to effect an amendment, it must be drafted into a bill after which it is submitted to the electoral body in charge of elections.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A constitutional amendment aims at positively changing the manner in which the citizens are governed, resources managed and the rights of citizens protected. The amendment is important as it addresses relevant and current legal needs.Schweikart and Allen (387-403) postulate that an amendment is not the whole process of “making of a constitution” but rather, a minor formal addition, change or rectification of a legal provision in a constitutional document that does not alter the legal powers of the new signed document.

The disparities between the two concepts A bill of rights cannot be altered while an amendment can. An amendment is the actual process of facilitating change or changes in the existing constitution. A bill of rights outlines the rights and privileges of the citizens while an amendment aims at making changes to the existing legal provisions that govern a state or country.

According to Vile (19-53), a bill of rights upholds the justice of all citizens. An amendment does not state the integrity of the citizens. It is worth noting that the bill of rights and amendments operate on a complementary basis.

Works Cited Schweikart, Larry, and Allen, Michael. A Patriot’s History of the United States: From Columbus’s Great Discovery to the War on Terror, USA: Penguin Group, 2004. Print.

Vile, John. Encyclopedia of Constitutional Amendments: Proposed Amendments, and Amending Issues, 1789-2002, USA: Library of Congress, 2003. Print.

[supanova_question]

Minimal State Liberals college essay help online

Both welfare and neo-classical liberals share some similarities arising from the fact they were born from the same set of ideals, but they also have their differing viewpoints that to a large extent stem from their divergent reactions to the social effects of the Industrial Revolution.

In similarities, it is clear both welfare and neo-classical liberals believe in the value and promotion of individual liberty and a desire for a more open and tolerant society, not mentioning that they are guided by the twin elements of individual rational self interest and competition in their attempts to promote self interest (Dolbeare

[supanova_question]

Götz and Meyer, written by David Albahari Research Paper a level english language essay help

Fictions on holocaust are often shocking because they depict murders by the Nazi prosecutions and cold-blooded massacre of Jews. Such stories are full of unsparing depiction of human sufferings and genocide to such an effect that, one fails to see perpetrators as humans, who used to be viewed as faceless entities that were programmed to commit murders.

The book Götz and Meyer, written by David Albahari, tries to prove the fact that the perpetrators have a human face. It is emphasized that the protagonists in the novel, who are two Nazi drivers of the gas trucks, are not mere murder machines. The author humanizes the characters in order to present a different way of perceiving the nature of evil. Through the humor and empathy implemented in the novel, the characters that embody two Nazi soldiers are given human faces instead of the sole image of a murderer.

A nameless teacher from Belgrade narrates the story about the destruction of the Serbian Jews during the war. He was obsessed with reconstructing his family tree, therefore, he toiled endlessly in the archives to gather information, but failed miserably for he could find only a few members of his family while there were sixty of them killed.

The narrator says, “For me to truly understand real people like my relatives, I had first to understand real people like Götz and Meyer.” . The novel is about these two characters, who were Nazi soldiers, being unknown to the narrator though.

When the narrator begins his narration, he knows nothing about William Götz and Erwin Meyer except for their names: “Götz and Meyer. Having never seen them, I can only imagine them.” Initially he describes them as unknown people or characters as described in a tale. They were German soldiers, they were SS commissioned, who were assigned the duty of driving a large truck for a “special purpose”. Their duty was to drive the truck every day to and from the fairground in Belgrade. The narrator constantly repeats the following line, “Having never seen them, I can only imagine them” (1) in order to imprint their images in the mind of the listeners, as well as in his own mind. One might say the narrator plays a dangerous game by trying to understand the characters at the risk of becoming them.

At this point, one must note the importance of memory in the novel. Robert Eaglestone in the book The Holocaust and the Postmodern highlights the fact that “memory” helps to “evoke nearly everything there is to a person and to a society.” (74) Eaglestone also believes that the way “we remember the past” helps in framing our identity.

Like most of the Holocaust fictions, the narrator too is nostalgic of his destroyed past and tells the story from memory. However, unlike most Holocaust fictions, Albahari does not depict an ugly picture of the time. His stories deal with death, killing, mass murders in gas chamber, but they do not describe all the sufferings in detail to haunt the reader’s imagination of the Nazi carnage. Rather, the “memory narration” of the novel builds a humane figure for the two people who were Nazis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Albahari describes the two protagonists, playing with children on the ground before they go back to work. He further underlines that both of them are married and worry about the children at home. One of them, maybe Meyer (again the narrator is unsure which one of them) is fond of children and like presenting them chocolates.

Now these children could easily be Jewish youngsters at Belgrade Fairground whom he had to transport in his truck. Such a scene shows that these two men were the victims. They were there to perform their duty, in reality, they were not monsters with evil eyes and poisonous fangs.

The narrator talks of the ambitions and desires of the protagonists. One of them, (again the narrator is unsure which one), wanted to be a pilot, and the other one has other dreams in his mind.

The narrator is often unsure how to differentiate between them, and often forgets to stress out who was doing some particular things in this or that scene, but these characters are not presented to the readers as caricature of evil villains. Rather, they are presented as individuals committed towards one task. The narrator describes the truck that the protagonists drive:

The truck was a Saurer, a five-tonner with a boxlike body, 1.7 meters high and 5.8 meters long … A full hundred people could stand in the back … During these trips, the souls became real souls, no longer human in form. Götz and Meyer most certainly knew what was happening in the back of the truck…After all, the people they were driving had no souls, that, at least, was a commonly known fact! Jews were nothing more than milder on the face of the world! And so, day in and day out, they would repeat their practiced routine.

This paragraph shows two protagonists in a bad light to the readers, showing that they were carriers of death to men, women, and children they carried in their truck and believed that they were soulless and faceless creatures. The routine involved the protagonists in the destruction of the Serbian Jews.

The novel shows a host of killings that were conducted by SS squads; they shot hundreds of people face to face. However, such mass killings made the German soldiers weary and took a toll on their morale. Therefore, a less personal means of massacre was employed through these mobile gas vans. For the first time, the readers view Götz and Meyer as murderers who helped in asphyxiation of many women and children in their truck.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Götz and Meyer, written by David Albahari specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The narration of the killings makes the narrator more involved, he describes how the protagonists would drive the truck into the distance, and one of them would put the exhaust pipe into the truck. After that, they were never involved in killing. Then, the dead bodies were driven to the Serbian prison where the bodies were dumped. While this gruesome process is being put into effect, the narrator imagines Gotz and Meyer “chatting with their commander”, again enabling the readers to look at these two bearers of death as humans.

The memory of the narrator plays a major role in the description of the biographical or historical fiction, especially that of the Holocaust . This piece of fiction is also drawn from the memory, but the narrator is truthful enough to say that he has not met the characters Goth and Meyer, and therefore, he is obliged to draw from his imagination, which of course has been discoursed with stereotypes.

Individual memory exists in a collective form, adhering to the social norms and framework . For example, in the story, the memory of the narrator was reconstructed by events and incidents that had been externally infused in his mind by those groups that influenced his memory.

Consequently, it is obvious that he will embitter feelings towards the two German soldiers he describes. His imagination is bound to have the stereotypes, and Jewish constructs influence his description of the story as well as the characters. This has helped in humanizing the characters as well.

The novel can be called humorous due to the deadpan tone of the narrator, presenting the story to the readers in a satirical tone. This gives the novel an uncanny comical feature. Once the readers pick a book on holocaust, the prevalent stereotypes play in their mind and eventually they expect a horror story of human atrocities and sufferings.

The element of empathy and humor present in the story is evident in the way the narrator describes the two Nazi protagonists. In a non-committal voice, as if he was narrating the story of any other man, he described how Götz and Meyer were performing their work and duties. He tried to imagine these men, having with their personal lives, full of concerns and problems. The implementation of humor in describing an act of atrocity makes it more tragic .

Humor in holocaust fiction does not imply that the whole story becomes a “carnival”; what is strives to portray is a different perspective of life at the time when it seems it can only be filled with death . Presence of puns and double meaning in dialogues is the essence of Holocaust fiction that is reiterated in Götz and Meyer.

The episode when the narrator describes his untimely desire to itch in the classroom and the episode where he subsequently visits a dermatologist is full of dark humor. After school, the narrator visits a doctor to get the problem of his itching examined. The doctor inquires of any past complaint of skin disease in the narrator’s family. To this query, the narrator sarcastically answers, “Most of them died of poisoning” .

Not sure if you can write a paper on Götz and Meyer, written by David Albahari by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Another instance where the narrator presents a case of dark, double edged humor was when he asked his students to imagine a journey to the camp and when he tells one of his students that she will not be allowed take her pet to the camp. She then contemptuously says “Why, this is inhuman” . Even the protagonists Götz and Meyer are subjected to dark humor as the narrator, making them human as well as inhuman at the same time.

The story uses various tropes to show Götz and Meyer as humans. One of them is when the narrator directly questions the readers:

What kind of man would … consent to do a job that meant putting five or six thousand souls to death? I find it hard to give a student a bad grade at the end of the semester, let alone at the end of the year, but that is nothing compared to the way Götz and Meyer must have felt.

The narrator at once makes the protagonists human and the very next moment brings out the ugly side of their work. By comparing his work as a teacher and their job as killers, the narrator puts two juxtaposing professions to bring out the satire in it. Thus, through interplay of human and inhuman characters to demonstrate the protagonists, Albahari has actually made Götz and Meyer two ordinary men rather than Nazi soldiers.

Bibliography Albahari, David. Gotz

[supanova_question]

Conflict Resolution Field’s Stages of Development Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Stages of development of conflict resolution field Stage one

Failure to control the eruption of the First World War led to people coming up with ways to avert reemergence of wars in the future. The first stage of development of conflict resolution modalities started in 1918 and went on until 1945. Idealistic views characterized this phase and individual states played a critical role in conflict resolution. One feature that makes this phase noteworthy is the attempt by the countries to resolve conflicts using a non-violent approach. Moreover, the phase marked the establishment of international relations.

Stage two

The second stage is also referred to as the second generation, which lasted between 1945 and 1965. Introduction of nuclear weapons led to the need for urgent conflict resolution management. Conflict resolution approaches used in this stage were state centered and every state strived to stem out the cause of the conflict. The feature that makes this stage noteworthy is the society’s endeavor to come up with conflict resolution methods using numerous institutions.

Stage three

The third stage of development of conflict resolution field started in 1965 and lasted until 1985. The cold war marked this period. Civil society sought to manage conflicts through mediation. They endeavored to nurture expertise in the community, promote labor intercession, and advocate for family conciliation. This phase is essential as it marked the establishment of an empirical interpretation of destructive conflict from interstate level aimed at attaining win-win accords between the superpowers.

Stage four

The fourth stage began after the end of the cold war in 1985 and lasted until 2005. In this phase, there was a need to introduce ‘new world order’ of conflict resolution. Individuals adopted the virtue of ‘complementarity’ and ‘contingency’ to help in conflict management. Dialogue took the centre stage of conflict resolution with a belief that soft forms of conflict resolution would help to restore trust between conflicting parties. This phase is crucial since it saw the involvement of non-governmental organizations in conflict resolution programs.

Stage five

The fifth stage of development of conflict resolution field started in 2005 and it is currently evolving. The struggle by countries to curb terrorism characterizes this stage. Countries strive to establish a peaceful regime by respecting cultures and advocating for democracy.

Besides, they encourage inter-country trade as one of the approaches of establishing peaceful coexistence between countries. This phase is noteworthy since it led to international cooperation between countries. Moreover, it led to many countries attaining their sovereignty as developed countries sought to promote democracy.

Definition of culture

One of the hardest concepts to elucidate is culture. Every day, people talk about culture. Nevertheless, when asked to describe what culture is all about, they become dumb.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Based on LeBaron, Avruch and Ramsbotham’s perceptions of culture, one may define culture as the collective deposit of beliefs, knowledge, meanings, hierarchies, spatial relations, experience, and religion that people borrow from contemporaries or their ancestors. In most cases, people accept these practices without questioning. Culture is figurative, and symbols are passed from one generation to another.

There are clear similarities and differences in LeBaron, Avruch, and Ramsbotham’s explanation of how culture contributes to conflict and conflict resolution. LeBaron alleges that culture plays a significant role in conflict and conflict resolution. He asserts that culture determines how individuals interpret things.

Besides, it tells people what they need to do. LeBaron accepts that culture is a key contributor to conflicts, especially in areas that entail development of personal values and identity.

Ramsbotham refutes claims that culture contributes to conflict. He claims that cultural variation does not contribute to conflicts, and they should not be factored in when coming up with conflict resolution policies. On the other hand, Avruch warns against application of “inadequate ideas” when dealing with conflict. Avruch claims that culture is possibly genetically rooted and locally changed.

Ramsbotham claims that culture plays a significant role in conflict resolution. He gives the example of religion, as one of the cultural factors that people ought to consider when developing conflict resolution mechanisms. LeBaron alleges that culture seeps into conflict despite the situation.

Consequently, to come up with viable conflict resolution mechanisms, it is imperative to understand the shared and unspoken beliefs of the conflicting parties. Ramsbotham and LeBaron believe that individuals contain inherent cultural aspects, which make them exhibit either positive or negative behaviors.

LeBaron, Avruch, and Ramsbotham share similar views with respect to culture and behavior. They all agree that culture influences the behavior of every society. Hence, they posit that it is rational to analyze the behaviors of the conflicting parties in line with their cultures prior to solving the conflict.

We will write a custom Essay on Conflict Resolution Field’s Stages of Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Dove Campaign Against Photo-enhanced Advertisements Case Study scholarship essay help

Introduction and overall evaluation It was reasonable for Dove to do campaign against photo-enhanced advertisements

Beauty and cosmetic producers often use photo-enhanced advertisements for their products. Photo-enhanced images deceive vulnerable potential customers who end up purchasing those products, some of whom are of low quality and standards.

Firms use photo-enhanced advertisements due to stiff competition in the industry, thus an effort to gain competitive advantage over other the competitors. Therefore, Dove intervened with the promotion trend in order to sensitise consumers on the tricks applied by producers when persuading customers to buy their products.

Dove carried out an initiative to promote all types of natural body images of women

The main objective of the campaign was to promote self-esteem in vulnerable females, easily deceived by photo-enhanced advertisements. Women care about their body images, and thus many players in the cosmetic industry use attractive images in promoting their products to women. Dove campaigns bar firms from using fake images on their product promotions as a moral obligation to protect the society from unethical businesspersons.

However, Dove is also a player in the cosmetic industry and cannot avoid using women imagery in product promotion campaigns. Most of its products are skin-firming cellulites that enhance women’s self-esteem. In order to drive the point home effectively, Dove used natural images of women in campaigns for its products. It is not possible to make consumer products and fail to exploit women because Dove exploited women in an effort to promote their self-esteem.

I would recommend Dove to continue with the campaign against abuse of women imageries in advertising. However, I would recommend Dove to change its moral approach by applying images that are pleasing to the public. Furthermore, I tend to believe that Dove prepared for criticisms that would arise against their campaigns from the beginning. Therefore, they should continue with the campaign and ignore the criticisms, but consider changing the images.

Campaign Critique Dove used unimpressive materials in the campaign efforts. Natural images are not impressive because they disclose the physique that women try to eliminate from their bodies. In addition, the majority of women hate fat bodies and due to that element, firms opted to use thin women in their advertisements to impress the targeted consumers. However, Dove should stick to their advertising material for they are the best for carrying out the sensitisation to the women.

Strengths and weaknesses of the Dove campaigns

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Strengths of the Campaign

Promotes ethics in the business – Photo-enhanced images are deceiving and thus unethical for a vendor to use them in an effort to attract customers. Dove’s campaign is ethical and beneficial to customers who often fall into traps of unethical vendors in the beauty and cosmetic industry.

It is sensitising the women whose rights are violated: The campaign is sensitising women about violation of their rights by vendors and firms that produce beauty products for economic reasons. Hence, women acquire knowledge about the types of advertisements that they should believe in before purchasing the products.

Promotes self-esteem:- Dove campaigns are for promoting the self-esteem of women who dislike their natural physique, and thus end up falling into the traps of deceiving vendors; In addition, it targets young females and encourages them to acknowledge their physical as they age.

Fights against sub-standard products: Firms producing sub-standard products take advantage of photo-enhanced advertisements in acquiring market share. Dove campaigns bar firms from taking advantage of unethical advertising methods, but rather concentrating on producing high quality products.

Promotes natural looks- By using natural images, women are inspired to appreciate their natural looks coupled with appreciating the physical appearance of their colleagues. Photo-enhanced images deter women from appreciating natural looks of their colleagues.

Weaknesses of the Campaign

Use of unimpressive images: Dove used natural images that were vulnerable to criticisms in its effort of promoting self-esteem to women. Natural images are unpleasant to the public arena although there was no alternative to bring the intended message home.

Economic impact: Effort to persuade women to acknowledge their natural physique had a negative economic impact. Players in the beauty and cosmetic industry started to count on losses after many women reduced their purchasing power on their products.

Failed to promote skin-firming products- Dove’s campaigns turned against its products as the public viewed it as a hypocrite player trying to gain market advantage over other players. There were criticisms that its campaigns were more of advertisements aimed at eliminating competitors from the market. Hence, the targeted consumers received Dove’s skin firming products with a bad attitude.

Rating of direct marketing is not an easy task, but done with regard to its effectiveness

The increase in the product’s sales volume is the ultimate measure of effectiveness of direct marketing. Percentage increase in sales volume is divided by 10 in order to obtain 1 to10 rating system, whereby 1 refers to absolute awful performance and 10 refers to great performance.

Dove needed to strengthen its campaign by two major factors into consideration

Those factors included ethics and its interests in the industry. It is unethical to display natural images that are disturbing to the public. For instance, there have been many criticisms on images of fat women displayed in the campaigns advertisements. It would be prudent for the company to consider using images that are pleasant, but natural.

In addition, Dove had economic interests in the industry, which put it under public criticisms. In order to strengthen its campaign, it should have pulled out of business and concentrated on the campaigns. Pulling out of business is a good move in the public arena and hence public would give attention to the campaigns.

Campaign Creation Dove is a new entrant in this business of sensitising public against fake products’ advertisements. Therefore, it has no competitors in the market, but the business focuses on the promotion of ethics adherence by other businesses. Even if a firm has no competitors in the market, that is, it enjoys monopoly in the market; it has to adhere to some rules and regulations as set by the authorities in a given location.

There are four main process of the campaign creation. The first step involves identification of the problem. Dove observes that businesses persons are using photo-enhanced advertisements that deceive customers, and end up frustrating clients after failing to meet their ends.

The second step for campaign creation is the development of the solution to the problem. In this case, solution to the problem is campaign against photo-enhanced advertisements for cosmetic and beauty products. In addition, dove considers some factors before carrying out the campaign.

These factors are business ethics and the effects of the campaign. To begin with, business ethics demand that businesspersons should uphold the value of the products and honesty to their clients, which they had failed to comply with thus opting to use photo-enhanced advertisements. Therefore, dove found itself in a good position to carryout the campaign.

We will write a custom Case Study on Dove Campaign Against Photo-enhanced Advertisements specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Secondly, dove needed to consider the effects the campaign would have to the public. The theme of the campaign was to create awareness to the public that cosmetic and beauty products do not bring the desired changes in the human skin as their advertisements dictate. Therefore, public should not rely on advertisements for information about them.

The third step is the development of the campaign. In this step, dove needed to consider the best method for the execution of the campaign depending on the nature of the target genre. In this case, the most affected clients were youthful and middle aged women and therefore decided to use natural images that would strike them hard.

In addition, it noted that photo-enhanced images were of skinny sized women and decided to incorporate fat women. In addition, dove identified the best method of campaign as advertisements in the televisions and billboards along the major highways and city streets.

The fourth step is execution of the campaign and evaluation of effects on the public. Initially, the public cannot welcome this new form of advertising because natural images are disgusting to the eyes of the public. However, dove prepared for criticisms from both the public and the businesspersons after which the public would react depending on how it responded to the criticisms.

[supanova_question]

Writer’s Choice Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Write a three-to-four-page paper, typed (12-point font), one-inch margins, no cover sheet, and double-spaced. When outlining your paper, find a particular interpreta¬tive standpoint from which to approach the topic, be focused and precise in your analysis, and provide a clear and well-defined thesis. Give particular examples from the play to support or test your thesis. Provide a clear argument throughout. Once you have chosen your examples stick to them! Avoid sweeping statements, broad historical characterizations (i.e. the Restoration, “in those times”), subjective adjectives (brilliant, great, ironic, beauti¬ful), and platitudes. Use a dictionary (for spelling, correct usage, and preci¬sion), double-check the spelling of charac¬ters and places, italicize the title of the play, and PROOF¬READ.

Do not use secondary literature or information found on the web or in the library. This paper should be just you, your ideas, and the given topic.

The Topic:

In Marriage a la Mode many characters use double-entendres. Before you start, define the term using The Oxford English Dictionary. List five occasions in which they are used and analyze them. Use the questions below as a guide or basis for your analysis. Once you have worked through them all, construct a solid argument and develop a reading of the function these double-entendres serve in the play. Give several examples for each of your answers and give page references, act, scene, and line numbers for each of the examples you have chosen. You may write your paper in sections or paragraphs following the questions below or you may present your analysis in an essay format. Regardless of the format you choose for your paper, you must write complete and grammatical sentences. Finally, keep in mind while answering the questions below that this is a play and that it was mainly meant to be acted, performed, and seen, rather than read.

1. Do the characters in the heroic, or high, plot use double-entendres, and if they do, where, when and with whom do they use them?
2. Do the characters in the comic, or low, plot use double-entendres, and if they do, where, when and with whom do they use them?
3. Contrast and compare this usage in the high and low plots.
4. What does your comparison yield?
5. If they are only used in one of the plots, give a hypothesis as to why this is the case.
6. Which specific characters use double-entendres most frequently?
7. What are they used for?
8. Are they always used to discuss the same subject? Or are they used to discuss different subjects? What do double-entendres allow the characters to discuss?
9. Break down the principal images, or metaphors that are employed in these double-entendres and explain them.
10. What do you think Dryden wants his audience to understand from this usage?

[supanova_question]

‘The Open Boat’ and ‘To Build a Fire’ Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

How the two narratives exemplify naturalism

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Naturalism was an offshoot of determinism and Darwinism. These schools of thought held that man had minimal control over his fate because the environment shaped his life. ‘The Open Boat’ and ‘To Build a Fire’ epitomize this literary movement. Not only do the writers use practical and succinct language that is typical of this school, but they also place greater emphasis on processes over people. This approach was in keeping with their reverence for neutrality.

How the two narratives exemplify naturalism Naturalists often make conservative use of language in their narrations and these two books are no exception. These authors detached themselves from their characters as well as the human situations. ‘The Open Boat’ describes the four men’s adventures with a great degree of temperance. The author had opportunities to exaggerate their accomplishments as well as their failures, but he did not.

The desperate nature of the characters is consistent with their dreary settings, so every stylistic choice matches developments in the story. One should also note that only one of the characters in the story has a name –Billie. This level of detachment testifies to the realism that naturalists liked. Similarly, the writing in ‘To Build a Fire’ was objective and concise. London stays away from the emotions and insecurities of his protagonist.

Nothing sets him apart as a special individual. In fact, the hard language in the narration and the twists and turns of the story make the man seem like a sideshow. The author’s language is objective and factual. For instance, he talks about the number of matches that the man used and why ice froze on his beard (London 36).

This stylistic choice was in tandem with his naturalist thought. He wanted to furnish the audience with objective information such that they can competently assess the environment. Naturalism also explains why London did not name his central character. Doing so would have detracted readers from the subject matter.

As the name implies, naturalism was a school of thought that focused on nature. It dwelt on ‘what is’ rather than ‘what should be’. Therefore, when pioneers of the intellectual school wrote about something, they gave precedence to the environment rather than the people in them.

For instance in ‘To Build a Fire’, readers can find a lot of information about nature. London talks about springs, creeks, fires, snow and how each of these natural processes can change and affect the elements surrounding them. In the book, one understands the repercussions of exposing one’s cheeks to extremely cold weather.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Likewise, the same description of all things natural can be found in ‘The Open Boat’. Most of the discussions in the piece dwell on how the sea operates; its waves and tides can change dramatically and thus affect those who are standing on its way. At the beginning of the story, the sea seemed like a merciless monster that the men personified.

However, towards the end of the story, they soon realize that the sea is a natural object (Crane 14). It has no intentions and does not inflict deliberate harm. Crane wanted to prove that nature is ‘what is’. Man is the one that gets too preoccupied with what it should be.

Naturalists ascribed to Darwinian and determinist thought. Darwin led the determinist school by demonstrating how evolution occurred. The scholar affirmed that the environment shapes organisms over extremely long periods of time. It caused them to develop different physical characteristics (mutate) from those of organisms within the same species. In subsequent times, groups that had favorable traits survived while the ones with unfavorable ones died.

Determinism proved that man was helpless against his environment. His free will had little to do with what occurred to him (Sorrentino 104). These themes are present in both narrations. In ‘The Open Boat’, the waves are frequently changing; the men have little control over these waves even after spending a substantial amount of time at sea. Man can do little to change the forces of nature. Therefore, he must accept this condition and only focus on reacting to what nature presents.

Naturalists believed in the insignificance of free will. Likewise, the author of ‘To Build a Fire’, wanted to show how even intellectualism could not save many from nature. The man had a map and was set on hunting for gold. However, he later had to abandon these ambitions because of the harsh weather.

The dog had a higher chance of survival than the man because it understood its place in the natural world. It reacted to its environment and thus outlived the man. However, the protagonist did not respect the power of the natural world and thus subjected himself to danger. The deterministic environment altered his goals and thus triumphed over his free will.

Many naturalists acknowledge the determinism of the environment, but they do not believe in its divinity. Nature was neither against or for man; it was simply present. Therefore, one should not expect moral judgment from nature as this will not materialize (Bender 92).

We will write a custom Essay on ‘The Open Boat’ and ‘To Build a Fire’ specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More London does not blame the man for the fall in the snow, and neither does he blame the snow. If one must ascribe moral responsibility on a party, then it should be placed on man since he can predict the consequences of his actions. Nature is also indifferent to man in ‘The Open Boat’.

The men initially blame the sea for their predicaments. In one occasion, they claim that the sea is hissing and snarling. However, the narrator later learns that nature was not against them when one large wave carries him to shore. One can thus deduce that nature is not a partisan party if it can rescue and cause harm at the same time.

Adherents of the naturalism movement favored members of the lower classes. Alternatively, their characters became classless in the wake of environmental forces. In ‘To Build a Fire’, the protagonist is probably one such character because he leaves his home for a dangerous expedition, in hostile weather, so as to hunt for gold (London 8). Conversely ‘Open Boat’ has an oiler, a correspondent, a cook as well as a captain. None of these titles matter in the grueling and unpredictable sea; all that counts is their survival.

Conclusion Naturalists strongly espoused neutrality. This is evident in their succinct and factual language as well as their focus on plot rather than the people in their narrations. The authors under analysis show that man’s free will is irrelevant, and even his intellectualism cannot fight nature. Conversely, London and Crane acknowledge the impartiality of nature and its inability to wield moral judgment over man.

Works Cited Bender, Bert. Sea-Brothers: The Tradition of American Sea Fiction from Moby-Dick to the Present. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press,1990. Print.

Crane, Stephen. 2011. The open boat and other tales of adventure. 2011. Web. ‹https://archive.org/details/openboatothertal00cranuoft/page/n6›

London, Jack. 2012. To build a fire. 2012. Web.

Sorrentino, Paul. Stephen Crane Remembered. Tuscaloosa: University of Alabama Press, 2006. Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on ‘The Open Boat’ and ‘To Build a Fire’ by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Strengths and Weaknesses of the Research Strategies Essay college admissions essay help

The research strategies proposed to develop the project in Engineering include the experimental work and data analysis with references to the conducted literature review. The experimental work and data analysis can be characterised by a lot of strengths. However, the proposed strategies also have definite limitations and weaknesses. Nevertheless, the focus on both the experimental work and data analysis is important to reduce the negative effects of the strategies’ limitations on the research project.

The experimental work is the necessary part of the project’s development in the field of engineering. The main strengths of the strategy are in possibilities to receive the results related to the real world situation. The laboratory experiment as one of the most effective scientific methods is characterised by creating the situation for obtaining the necessary quantitative data for the research.

The laboratory experiment is used to confirm the researchers’ hypotheses and observe the particular features or possible changes in the work of the project. Nevertheless, the laboratory experiment also has definite weaknesses which should be taken into consideration while analysing the experiment data.

Experiments are time-consuming procedures which are developed in the artificial environment approximated to the real world. That is why, many assumptions should be taken into account. Furthermore, the experiment results are based on the work with the concrete project, and it is usually difficult to generalise the data.

The findings of the laboratory experiment should be analysed to conclude about the project’s results. The data analysis is the important stage of the project’s development, and it depends on the previous literature review significantly. The data analysis should be realised with references to the results of the previous studies and researches in order to make conclusions about the urgency and originality of the current research.

From this point, the main strengths of the data analysis strategy are in providing the information about the reliability and validity of the research. Moreover, much attention should be paid to the conceptual framework and theoretical background. The data analysis is traditionally provided with references to the results of the previous researches in order to concentrate on the innovations and changes in the projects’ procedures and outcomes.

The data analysis based on the detailed literature review of the latest researches in the definite sphere of knowledge follows the trends in the field and provides the necessary depth in discussion the certain project. Thus, there are two stages associated with the analysis of the data in the research.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The first stage in the form of literature review is necessary to present the theoretical background for the research and determine the aspects which need to be stressed on in the project. The second stage of the data analysis is connected with examining the experiment’s results and drawing conclusions with references to the previous studies in the field.

However, the data analysis can be also associated with a range of weaknesses which can limit the wide usage of the experiment’s results. That is why, it is important to pay attention to the possible incompleteness of the results and to their concrete character which does not allow further generalisation of the findings.

Focusing on the qualitative data presented in the reviewed literature, it is necessary to pay attention to the latest researches because of a lot of dated material. Furthermore, the information presented in the literature is often given only from one perspective. Thus, it is necessary to concentrate on reliable resources providing the information free from the researchers’ bias.

[supanova_question]

The key organizational elements of the aviation industry Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Training of air crew

Conclusion

References

Introduction The aviation industry comprises of a complex system that aims at delivering safe and efficient air transport. The industry has various organizational elements that ensure that service provision in the industry is up to standard. Among the important elements of ensuring this are the selection and training of aircrew. It is very important to have a competent aircrew that will ensure safety and minimal errors in the aviation industry.

Safety is one of the most critical factors in the aviation sector. It plays a major beneficial role in the prevention of accidents as well as in the enhancement of the financial performance of the aviation sector. It is important for the players in the aviation sector to take measures to ensure flight safety at all times.

One of the measures that should be taken by the aviation association is the implementation of safety management systems whereby, the different stakeholders in the aviation industry such as pilots, engineers and the rest of the cabin crew are facilitated with skills to ensure safe operations (Harold

[supanova_question]

Minimal State Liberalism vs. Active State Liberalism Essay (Critical Writing) scholarship essay help

Over the years of human history, the world has witnessed many philosophies come and go. Most of them rise and fade away quickly, yet a few remain take hold, and affect the whole world forever. A good example is democracy and communism. In the U.S.A., democracy and capitalism are the overriding philosophies, yet the support for these systems has left people divided into three main categories: the liberals, the conservatives, and the radicals.

As a result of these three dominant divisions, it is evidenced that each group has a strong stand about government intervention and freedom. Minimal state liberals argue strongly that government intervention is a bad thing for the freedom of Americans and active state liberals argue strongly that government intervention is necessary to preserve the freedom of Americans.

This work contends for the view that even though government intervention may limit freedom of persons in a democracy, the system of democracy has in itself some vices that can never be left to fate. The vices of democracy are such as may lead to its own self destruction. Never once have the people been able to stand to correct the excesses of capitalism, only the government can do that (Dolbeare

[supanova_question]

Capgras Syndrome Research Paper cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

History

Manifestations

Possible Causes

Effects

Treatment

Conclusion

References

Introduction Capgras syndrome or Capgras delusion is a neuropsychological condition in which the affected person thinks that a close acquaintance or a family member has been replaced by a similar imposter. Capgras is usually classified as a delusional disorder and it is quite uncommon. Some psychologists have referred to the Capgras syndrome as the “imposter syndrome” (Hirstein and Ramachandran, 2007).

The syndrome is named after Joseph Capgras who was the first psychologist to describe this condition. Capgras syndrome is usually common in people who are suffering from other psychotic disorders such as Schizophrenia, dementia, and brain injuries. The complexity of this syndrome presents a challenge to both the patient and the people around him/her.

Around psychology circles, Capgras is considered to be a rare neuropsychological condition (Ellis and Lewis, 2001). This paper will present an analysis of Capgras syndrome including its history, manifestations, possible causes, effects, and possible treatment methods.

History Joseph Capgras was a psychiatrist of French origin who lived between 1873 and 1950. Capgras first described elements of this disorder in 1923 through a case study he conducted on a woman who claimed that her husband had been replaced by an identical imposter. Capgras and the co-author of this study first referred to the syndrome as “the illusion of doubles” (Fischer, Keeler and Schweizer, 2009).

Initially, Capgras syndrome was considered a symptom of schizophrenia that was exclusively manifested within the female population. After Capgras’s initial study of the condition, the subsequent studies were more psychoanalytical in nature. A breakthrough in the study of Capgras syndrome was made in the 1980s. This is when the syndrome was categorized as a neurological disorder after a series of studies.

Manifestations Capgras syndrome can be manifested without any warning taking both the patient and his/her caregivers by surprise. For instance, an old woman who is experiencing symptoms of Capgras syndrome might react with shock one morning after thinking that the person ‘claiming’ to be her husband is an imposter.

This is in spite of the fact that she can still recognize her husband’s appearance and mannerisms. Even after being reassured by other family members, the woman can still believe that the family members are a part of the impersonation scheme. Patients suffering from Capgras syndrome might also feel that multiple members of their family have been systematically replaced.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The suspicions against this replacement might also extend to pets and other household objects. There are various documented cases of Capgras’s manifestation. One of these manifestations was through a sixty-five year old woman who had previously been diagnosed with Alzheimer’s disease. The manifestation included instances of the woman’s husband trying to get her to recognize him.

The woman responds by telling her husband that he “looks like” her husband but she knows “that he is not him” (Fischer, Keeler and Schweizer, 2009). The woman goes on to tell her husband that he is one of the two imposters that come around pretending to be her husband. This case represents a real life manifestation of Capgras syndrome.

Although cases of Capgras syndrome are most common among women, they have also been witnessed among men. In a 2002 case study, an “89-year-old man who had earlier been diagnosed with Lewy Body Dementia was discovered by security guards while trying to locate his other apartment” (Silva and Leong, 2010). The man believed that he had ‘two’ apartments that were ‘exactly alike’ but he only slept in one at night.

Possible Causes It is not exactly known what causes Capgras syndrome but psychiatrists have forwarded various theories on possible causes. All these theories have a viable level of credibility. The first theory asserts that Capgras syndrome is caused by a malfunctioning of the brain’s visual cortex and the emotions of familiarity (Ramachandran, 2007). According to this theory, the patient’s eyes see the actual image but the emotional interpretation of familiarity is faulty.

This is why the patients identify characters as “exact” imposters. This theory is cemented by the fact that sometimes brain injury victims with Capgras are able to indentify characters over the phone only for them to claim they are imposters when they meet them face-to-face. This scenario may suggest that sounds are more connected to the familiarity process of the brain than sights. One of the most probable causes of Capgras syndrome is brain injuries.

The connection between familiarity and Capgras syndrome suggests that the disorder is caused by the part of the brain that controls familiarity. This diagnosis makes Capgras a biological disorder. This syndrome should not be confused with Prosopagnosia. Prosopagnosia is a disorder that refers to an individual’s inability to recognize familiar faces (Ellis and Lewis, 2001). Unlike Prosopagnosia, Capgras syndrome involves total facial recognition.

Effects Some neuropsychological disorders can be accompanied by symptoms that pose a danger to patients and those around them. Some instances of Capgras symptoms have resulted in violent behaviors or even death. This usually happens when the patient becomes violent towards his/her perceived imposters.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Capgras Syndrome specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, instances of violent behaviors are minimal. In addition, the existing research on the subject does not provide enough information to enable psychologists to predict the instances of violent behavior. The available literature on the subject indicates that there are very few studies that have focused on the issue of danger and Capgras syndrome.

Recent literature on Capgras does not address the dangers associated with patients suffering from Capgras syndrome. Moreover, all the recorded cases of violence in people suffering from Capgras have been connected to pre-existing conditions such as Schizophrenia and bipolar disorders. According to psychologists, various factors should be put into consideration when assessing the dangers associated with Capgras syndrome (Silva and Leong, 2010).

The first of these considerations is the co-existing forms of delusions in patients suffering from Capgras syndrome. The psychiatrist should also consider the accessibility of the people that the patient considers as imposters because close proximity to these “imposters” might increase the instances of violence. The pre-existing emotional dynamics that act as predisposing factors of violence should also be considered when assessing the dangers associated with Capgras syndrome.

Treatment Psychiatrists Dohn and Crews (2006) believe that Capgras syndrome is not as rare as it is currently believed. This is why treatment and management of this disorder should be prioritized. Moreover, some psychologists believe there should be more public and professional awareness on this neuropsychological disorder.

People who are experiencing Capgras syndrome can be highly perplexed and disturbed by this condition. This is also true for the caregivers of these people (Fischer, Keeler and Schweizer, 2009). There are various documented ways of managing Capgras syndrome. The complexity associated with the management of this syndrome has to do with the fact that effective management practices are very disturbing for caregivers of those affected by Capgras.

Most caregivers tend to turn to practices that aggravate the symptoms of this disorder. Treatment options for Capgras syndrome are based on an individual patient’s requirements. The management of this disorder aligns with the general management of other dementia related conditions.

Habilitation Therapy is one of the practices that are effective in the management of Capgras. This therapy specifies three concepts that are helpful to patients including choosing not to argue or correct the patient, “entering the reality of the person with dementia”, and creating positive experiences emotionally (Fischer, Keeler and Schweizer, 2009).

Seeing the world through an affected person’s eyes enables caregivers to understand the needs of these patients. The caregivers should also avoid arguing or correcting a person with Capgras syndrome. It is always advisable to avoid constant confrontation by avoiding arguments.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Capgras Syndrome by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Constant arguing could lead to feelings of resentment in both the affected person and his/her caregivers. The other specification of Habilitation Therapy is to keep supplying positive reassurances to the affected person. Effective management of Capgras involves connecting emotionally with the affected person. In some cases, therapeutic and psychotic drugs are used in the treatment process. Other psychiatrists use cognitive therapy to help patients manage their daily lives.

Conclusion Capgras syndrome is a disorder that is closely related to dementia (Oulis, Dimitrakopoulos and Konstantakopoulos, 2012). Although it is a rare condition, the public needs to be educated about its manifestations, causes, and treatment options. There is lack of enough literature that focuses on the disorder’s relationship with violent behavior. Those affected by Capgras syndrome should seek psychological help with the assistance of their caregivers.

References Dohn, H.,

[supanova_question]

Similarities and Differences Between Communism and Democratic Socialism Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

The main similarity between revolutionary Communism and democratic Socialism is that both of these political ideologies consider Capitalism (as the form of a socio-political governing) historically outdated and utterly immoral. This is because, according to the proponents of both ideologies, in Capitalist countries, the majority of ordinary citizens are denied the right to have a fair share in the national wealth.

This is because in Capitalist societies, it is namely a small number of the representatives of bourgeoisie that exercise a unilateral control over the means of production. In its turn, this allows them to enjoy an undisputed dominance within the society – even though that there are no objective reasons for this to be the case.

That is, if we exclude the fact that the wealthy members of social elites simply happened to have enough of ill-gotten money in their bank accounts. In its turn, this creates a situation when most citizens are being denied the opportunity of a social advancement – only the individuals affiliated with the rich and powerful qualify for a social uplifting. Such state of affairs, of course, is far from being considered thoroughly fair.

Another thing, upon which revolutionary Communism and democratic Socialism agree, is the sheer inappropriateness of the Capitalist practice of subjecting workers to an economic exploitation.

This is because this practice establishes preconditions for employees to be treated as a soulless commodity – hence, causing them to experience the sensation of a societal alienation. In its turn, this prevents hired laborers (regardless of the essence of their professional duties) from being able to attain happiness. Both ideologies refer to such a state of affairs, as utterly inappropriate.

Revolutionary Communism and democratic Socialism also criticize Capitalism on the account of this political system standing in opposition to the concept of egalitarianism.

After all, it is specifically the assumption of people’s perceptual/cognitive inequality, which justifies the Capitalist idea that, in order to ensure the free-market economy’s proper functioning; societies must remain stratified along class-lines. Both, Communists and Socialists proclaim this idea being not only unethical, but also as such, that contradicts the dialectical laws of history.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Revolutionary Communists and democratic Socialists also share a strongly negative attitude towards the concept of a private ownership. According to the proponents of both political ideologies, the continual institutionalization of this type of ownership contributes to the process of a gap between poor and rich citizens growing wider, and makes the economy more vulnerable to financial crises.

This is why, just as it is being the case with democratic Socialists, revolutionary Communists advocate the concept of a state-ownership, as such that ensures a fair distribution of the national wealth among citizens.

Nevertheless, even though that revolutionary Communism and democratic Socialism do share much of an ideological ground, out which they initially emerged, there are many more differences between them than similarities. The most fundamental of these differences is the fact that, while Socialists consider Socialism to be the final phase of the humanity’s socio-economic advancement, Communists refer to it in terms of an intermediary one.

According to them, Socialism is the ‘transitional’ form of a political governing, which will be eventually replaced by Communism (Kors 3). In its turn, Communism presupposes the complete liquidation of a private ownership, the elimination of money, as the instrument of commercial transactions, and the establishment of the ‘dictatorship of proletariat’, as the mechanism of maintaining the society’s ‘classless’ functioning.

Democratic Socialists, on the other hand, point out to the fact that the practical realization of the earlier mentioned Communist agenda will prove impossible, as it does not consider the actual essence of people’s genetically predetermined psychological inclinations.

Another major difference between democratic Socialism and revolutionary Communism is that, while Socialists refer to the transition between Capitalism and Socialism in terms of an evolutionary process, Communists promote the idea that this transition should be revolutionary.

That is, according to Communists, there is only one way for ensuring the eventual triumph of Socialism/Communism – an armed uprising (Dobbs 495). Socialists, on the other hand, suggest that rather than parting away with Capitalism in the revolutionary manner (by the mean of overthrowing the government and eliminating bourgeoisie, as a social class), progressively minded people should aim to create preconditions for the gradual transformation of Capitalism into Socialism.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Similarities and Differences Between Communism and Democratic Socialism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As Roberts noted: “In economics, their (Socialists’) main commitment is not to creating a new man by expropriating the expropriators but to taming the excesses of the market through state intervention. They (Socialists) have also been stubbornly reformist and gradualist rather than revolutionary” (358).

Unlike their Communist counterparts, Socialists do not subscribe to the idea that a truly fair society must necessarily be classless. In fact, the Socialist idea of a ‘welfare state’ presupposes that, instead of remaining antagonized against each other, the representatives of different social classes should be equally affiliated with the values of a ‘communal solidarity’.

Partially, the earlier mentioned conceptual dichotomy between democratic Socialism and revolutionary Communism can be explained by the fact that democratic Socialists do not think that the continual functioning of Capitalist societies should necessarily result in strengthening the acuteness of class-related antagonisms.

The validity of this suggestion can be illustrated in regards to the ideas of Eduard Bernstein, who is now being considered the ‘father’ of democratic Socialism. According to Sturmthal: “He (Bernstein) pointed out that by its progress labor was gradually transforming the capitalistic society and predicted that by this method of gradual reform and in co-operation with democratic middle-class parties, European labor would win democracy, and, at the end of a long evolutionary process, establish Socialism” (101).

Communists, on the other hand, promote the idea that, as time goes on; the intensity of class-antagonisms within Capitalist societies should increase. In its turn, this should eventually lead to the creation of a ‘revolutionary situation’, and consequently to the removal of bourgeois governments.

This brings us to discuss another important difference between both political ideologies. Whereas, democratic Socialists do favor democracy, as the people-oriented form of a political governing, Communists do not think this is actually the case – especially when we talk about the democracy’s functioning within Capitalist societies.

According Communists, ‘capitalist democracy’ is nothing but the instrument for the representatives of social elites to maintain its dominance within the society. The reason for this is simple. By providing ordinary citizens with the illusion that they can indeed influence the process of a political decision-making, by the mean of casting their votes, capitalists are able to reduce the acuteness of economic tensions within the society – hence, making these citizens less likely to revolt against being continually exploited.

After all, the very conceptual premise of democracy presupposes the process of people casting their votes being second in importance to the process of these votes’ calculation. This is exactly the reason why, according to revolutionary Communists, the concept of democracy is synonymous with the concept of corruption. It also explains why democracy is dialectically predetermined to transform itself into oligarchy/plutocracy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Similarities and Differences Between Communism and Democratic Socialism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Hence, the Communist idea that the best form of government is the ‘dictatorship of proletariat’ when, after having eliminated capitalists physically, workers enjoy a shared ownership over the means of production. This idea derives out of the assumption that capitalists will never be willing to share some of their riches with the society’s underprivileged members – unless when they are being forced to do so by purely external circumstances.

These circumstances, however, must be strong enough. Therefore, in order for socially underprivileged citizens to cease being the subjects of an economic/societal exploitation, they must be ready to defy the very principles, upon which the continual functioning of Capitalist societies is based – including the principle of a democratic voting.

In its turn, this explains why; whereas, democratic Socialists refer to their presence in the Capitalist countries’ legislative bodies, as such that serves the purpose of the society’s betterment, Communists do not make any secret of the fact that the only reason why they participate in political elections, is that this provides them with yet additional opportunity to undermine ‘bourgeois democracies’ from within.

Revolutionary Communism and democratic Socialism also differ, in regards to how the proponents of both ideologies address the issue of people’s political opinions being formed. According to Communists, the manner in which a particular individual perceives the surrounding socio-political reality reflects the specifics of his or her affiliation with one or another social class.

In other words, it is namely people’s class-status, which causes them to be what they are, in the cognitive sense of this word. Democratic Socialists, on the other hand, refer to the Communist interpretation of what causes people to adopt a particular behavioral pattern, as being overly simplistic. According to them, regardless of what happened to be the particulars of people’s class-affiliation, it is in their very nature to strive to enjoy a social fairness.

Hence, the democratic Socialist idea that it is possible for the representatives of different social classes to cooperate. It is needless to mention, of course, that Communists do not agree with this idea, because according to them, the wealthy representatives of social elites, on the one hand, and impoverished workers/peasants, on the other, are sworn enemies. Therefore, there can be no cooperation with then, by definition.

The final difference between both ideologies is that, while revolutionary Communism implies that people’s likelihood to attain happiness is being solely concerned with their varying ability to satisfy their physiological needs, democratic Socialism suggests that, besides being provided with the opportunity to fill up their stomachs, people also need to be given the chance of an emotional/spiritual self-actualization.

In its turn, this can be explained by the fact that, unlike Communists, democratic Socialists believe that there is so much more to a particular individual than solely his or her desire to enjoy having a plenty of food. In this respect, democratic Socialism appears much more intellectually refined, as compared to revolutionary Communism, because it avoids making simplistic assumptions about human nature.

Works Cited Dobbs, Darrell. “Communism.” The Journal of Politics 62.2 (2000): 491- 510.Print.

Kors, Alan. “Can There be an ‘After Socialism’?” Social Philosophy

[supanova_question]

Internet security policy Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Organization’s policy on the use of corporate digital resources

Internet Security Policies

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Since its inception, the Internet has experienced threats in its underlying communications network and nodes, protocols, network administration as well as host systems.

These threats have repeatedly been located in the security mechanisms of the hosts (Doddrell, 1995, Highland, 1996), examples being the capacity to obtain unauthorized private access, and the aptitude to gain unauthorized access to passwords. Furthermore, the commercial usage of the Internet has introduced new threats, such as the interception of data in transit by competitors or criminals.

Hackers, competitors, disgruntled employees and ex-employees have been exploiting Internet threats (Doddrell, 1995), forcing banks to recognize the changed nature of the Internet environment from uncompetitive and trustworthy to competitive and hostile. There is also increasing fear within the banking sectors over threats emanating from their own, trusted employees.

In other words, banks and other organizations are not only exposed to Internet threats from outside their boundaries, but also represent threats to other internet users. This rather new Internet security problem for organizations demands solutions in the form of different security policies, procedures and mechanisms.

This paper will discuss acquired expertise, judgment and maturity on the subject of cyber/information security, as well as Internet security policy and associated procedures which convey security guidance and rules to an organization and its employees.

Organization’s policy on the use of corporate digital resources The networking of distributed data and documents requires the interoperability of systems and services, which in turn require standards. In the development of an Internet security policy for a bank, it is essential that the risks to the organization arising from the Internet connection be addressed.

This requires the detection of pertinent risks, followed by a prioritization of the risks by the use of a risk assessment (Gollmann, 1999). Banks need to implement holistic perspectives in any solution to information security (Hartmann, 1995; Hitchings, 1995; Lichtenstein, 1996; Yngstrom, 1995), and for this reason, their Internet security policies should include administrative, human and technical Internet security considerations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though, organizations have largely disregarded the need for Internet security policy. This may be partly because of the limited guidance which has been available for the development and definition of such policy.

In line with this, the framework for an organization’s Internet security policy must considers the Internet risks experienced by the organization, and features a holistic approach to development. Use of the framework will allow the production of well-structured, comprehensive and effective Internet security policies for the organizations (Engestrom, 2000).

Internet Security Policies Various Internet security policies for banks exist; for example, the NASA Internet Acceptable Usage Policy (NASA, 1996). Though, current bank policies appear to be acceptable usage policies, or information protection policies, the following six sub policies form part of an organization’s Internet security policy:

Enterprise Internet acceptable usage policy

Employee Internet acceptable usage policy

Internet information protection policy

Internet information publication policy

Internet information access policy

Internet employee privacy protection policy

Each of these is summarized below:

Enterprise Internet acceptable usage policy: This policy should contain guidelines for the organization indicating acceptable and unacceptable uses of their Internet connection

Employee Internet acceptable usage policy: This policy should contain the security responsibilities for individual employees, and the acceptable and unacceptable purposes for which the employees may use the organization’s Internet connection.

Internet information protection policy: This policy should contain guidelines for the protection of the organization’s information resources from risks emanating from other Internet participants.

We will write a custom Essay on Internet security policy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Internet information publication policy: This policy should contain guidelines for the division, allocation, electronic publication, and dissemination of information via the Internet.

Internet information access policy: This policy should contain guidelines for allowing and disallowing access to an organization’s information resources via the Internet.

Internet employee privacy protection policy: This policy should contain guidelines for providing an organization’s employees with privacy protection from other Internet participants.

Conclusion Standards and practices for interoperability of digital information in the banking sector must incorporate the means to authenticate senders, receivers, sources, data, and documents, and to determine copyright and access permissions (Baskerville, 1988).

Finding ways to address these requirements while facilitating open access to information ease of use, and adaptation to local practices is among the grander challenges of constructing an information infrastructure (Agree, 2003). With the implementation of empirical data indicating current and planned activity in Internet security policy within organizations, it is obvious that success can be achieved.

Reference List Agree, P. E. (2003). Information and institutional change: The case of digital libraries. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

Baskerville, R. (1988). Designing Information Systems Security. Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Differences between Grameen Danone and Conventional Social Enterprise Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Social enterprise is a non-profit business that applies commercial plan to maximise innovations as well as developing the environment (Drayton 2010). Grameen Danone, as a social enterprise, is a non-profit making company. In general, it serves on humane grounds by assisting in fighting malnutrition in poverty-stricken regions like Bangladesh. Set up in 2006, the company opted to sell fortified yoghurt at a low price ranging between 0.09 and 0.17USD.

On the other hand, conventional businesses extremely rely on high cost of their products to remain sustainable in the global and competitive market (Grameen Danone: Youths For Social Entrepreneurship 2012). Clearly, conventional businesses majorly depend on large profit margins in order to meet their strategic goals and objectives. Notably, conventional businesses have profit maximization as a key agenda in their daily operations. This is contrary to Grameen Danone’s goal in the market; they offer products at extremely low prices.

Apart from the philanthropic nature, Grameen Danone is tasked with empowering needy people in the community. Therefore, the company employs Bogra villagers in their Yoghurt factory, in Bangladesh. This shows their purpose to create job opportunities for the environs. The company further supports the villagers by purchasing their milk for processing Yoghurt. This shows that Grameen Danone helps the community by offering them extra income through the milk purchase.

The support to the community is also evident through the employment of Bogra women as sales ladies to conduct door-to-door yoghurt advertisement. The company offered the women 10% of their sales as commission. Currently, Grameen Danone has availed over 160 jobs within the Bogra district.

Evidently, this company’s mandate is to create a social impact to the society (Grameen Danone: Youths For Social Entrepreneurship 2012). Conversely, conventional enterprises’ mandate is to ensure high sales for their goods and services at a favourable market price; their main purpose is to lay effective strategies that will enable them expand their internal operations and influence in the market.

Grameen Danone has a social multi-focus strategy in the community; it aims at empowering parts of the society and minimizing malnutrition among children in impoverished zones. On the other hand, conventional enterprises focus on the economic development that is centred on customers’ satisfaction and continuity (Monroe-White 2012).

They focus on the rate of product reception and consumption among their potential customers. But, they do not go ahead to determine the effect of their product on the consumers’ well-beings. Conventional enterprises may only support communities at will. This is through Corporate Social Responsibilities (CSR); firms engage in CSR as a means of supporting the community in their surrounding.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some of the activities that amount to CSR include a scholarship for needy students, engaging in environmental protection awareness and engaging in HIV/AIDS awareness programs. Markedly, these activities are not the key strategic objectives of conventional commercial enterprises. It is worth noting that, for Grameen Danone, such activities are the key strategic objectives.

Historically, Grameen Danone has two financiers, Grameen Bank and the Danone factory. This factory process bottled water and dairy products such as Yoghurt and milk. Interestingly, the bank was providing microcredit to the poor in the society. The villagers could engage in business activities thereby supporting their livelihoods.

This strong background on community support laid a solid foundation for the operation of Grameen Danone. In the economic front, conventional enterprises focus on personal or corporate growth and development. For instance, McDonald’s Food Chains and Wal-Mart are operating to register high profits; the huge part of the profits directly benefits the owners as they use them in expanding their businesses.

However, a social enterprise like Grameen Danone pays emphasis on societal well-being. It tries to uplift all persons in the society irrespective of their social classes, disabilities, and other challenges.

Grameen Danone plans to have every person drive the economy, as opposed to conventional enterprises that fear competition. They want people to purchase their products with no empowerment knowledge on how to produce the products. These two enterprises address social, environmental and economic challenges from an out rightly different perspective.

According to Monroe-White 2012, conventional commercial enterprises engage in a competitive business in order to gain competitive advantage over their competitors. They are predominantly found in an innovation-driven economy since they use new technological methods to attract and maintain their customers.

In such markets, there are price-wars among companies with the aim taking control of the markets. Grameen Danone, however, operates in a competition-free market. This is supported from nature in which it operates; it does not have to advertise its products to get more consumers. They are the ones who identify a region of operation and the number of people to serve. This is in line with the social responsibility that the company has adopted.

We will write a custom Essay on Differences between Grameen Danone and Conventional Social Enterprise specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, the company operates as a simple, but it is well-designed. Profit from the sale of products is refunded to Grameen Danone and is reinvested for the company expansion. The company impacts more on the community since it empower employments to many people by building more factories.

The Grameen Danone Company sustains the social values in the communities, creates new opportunities, and engages in innovations. Its decision-making process does not rely on capital ownership; it is distributed in limited and a minimal amount of labour. However, investors who do business with Grameen Danone Company do not benefit them further in the realization of their social and environmental goals (State as Conventional Commercial Enterprise n.d.).

Its membership is an open set of goals in accordance to the public interest. According to the US, social enterprise addresses social needs through product promotion or high rate of employment they offer to people. In addition, they do not relay on the government support as they are non-profit.

Social enterprise is a citizen initiative as it involves people from the community who share and educate themselves on their needs. It is a community benefit as it offers employment to people belonging to the community. Social enterprise can include external revenues outside its market.

Their proprietors are hidden hence not identified by the law. Besides, the real proprietors are the top managers of the business. They distribute income in form of salaries and benefits while price formation, is based socially by involving mechanisms of powers, which can come from non customers or real customers.

Conventional business differs from the social enterprise in that conventional business sells its goods and services with an aim of making profit. It receives revenue inform of taxes. In addition, they pay costs associated in the provision of services with the intention of getting back profit, and then the business distributes it to the proprietors who are the beneficiary. Conventional business pays for its services.

Additionally, conventional business has different prices for their different services inform of different levels of taxation, and they mostly depend on the government (State as Conventional Commercial Enterprise n.d.). However, the proprietors’ nature in the conventional business are disguised in every aspect of their life; socially, economically and politically. This includes the nature of customers, revenues, price formation and how they relate with property; it is their secret.

Further, conventional enterprises do not link revenues and property basing on the economic power. Besides, their key revenue comes from the sale of goods and services while their proprietor’s cost relies on input resources, labour and land. Their profit comes from the revenues after subtracting everything left from the sales while capital gains and dividends are their form of income (State as Conventional Commercial Enterprise n.d.).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Differences between Grameen Danone and Conventional Social Enterprise by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Through economic interaction during the sale of goods, they make form their price since their key customers are the buyers of their goods and services. In the conventional business, stakeholders are the real proprietors who are legally identified by the law, however, no exclusive rights are based on power or position is entitled to them. In addition, there are no exclusive revenues from the outside market.

In conclusion, Grameen Danone applies business principles to solve a social problem with no profit making intentions. From this perspective, it operates in a large field that had been discussed above; for example, health and economic development. Conventional enterprises apply business principles to develop their internal and external growth systems.

Profit maximization remains the core purpose for such enterprises thereby forcing them to strategise on inculcating new technological inventions in order to remain profitable in the competitive market (Monroe-White 2012). The French business, Grameen Danone remains a pioneer in the social enterprise field.

References Drayton, B., 2010, September 5, Social entrepreneurship: Characteristics of social entrepreneurship. Web.

Grameen Danone: Youths For Social Entrepreneurship 2012, Youths For Social Entrepreneurship | Youths Changing Their World. Web.

Monroe-White, T 2012, Organizational Differences of Social and Conventional Enterprises: A Cross-Country Approach. Web.

State as Conventional Commercial Enterprise, Theory of the State. Web.

[supanova_question]

Trifles by Susan Glaspell and The Hairy Ape by Eugene O’Neil Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Trifles by Susan Glaspell

The Hairy Ape by Eugene O’Neil

Conclusion

Introduction Novels, plays, songs and poems have been used in various ways by many scholars to convey important messages to their audience. People can view themselves in many literature presentations and realize the mistakes they make in life. Literature warns, educates, entertains and informs people about their societies and what shapes their behavior. This essay examines how play writers expose different perceptions of human beings through their characters and themes.

Trifles by Susan Glaspell This play was written in 1916 and it explores various perceptions of men and women and how they behave when faced with different challenges. The author condemns gender stereotypes by exposing the evils associated with male chauvinism. She manages to show her audience how people have equal abilities to manage various issues in the society. The play presents how the detectives failed to discover what killed Mr. John Wright.

On the other hand, the three ladies present in the room are shocked at how these ‘professionals’ are not able to gather clues that will lead to the arrest of the culprit. In addition, the audience is able to see the evils associated with gender stereotypes. The women concealed the evidence that would have been used to find out the cause of the death being investigated.

This play is a good example of how the society continues to fail due to weird gender perceptions. The murder investigators think that they know their work better than other people. In fact, they think that women cannot help them in any way to establish the truth regarding this matter.

On the other hand, these women are submissive and they do not want to engage in arguments with men. Even though they look innocent, they inwardly laugh at the fruitless attempts shown by the incompetent investigators. This is expressed in their conversations when the attorney and sheriff say that the house has no evidence to lead to any meaningful case. This play shows that men think that women are weak, illiterate and must be kept in the kitchen. On the other hand, women respect men but inwardly laugh at their failures.

The Hairy Ape by Eugene O’Neil This play portrays how wealth and power cause discriminations and class differences in the society. O’Neil uses bleak realism and natural conversation to create uniqueness. Literature continues to evolve and thus O’Neil was in the right path towards revolutionizing stage drama.

He has used a natural style to present his views to enable the theme of the play to blend with the behavior of the main character. Yank is a primitive but meticulous young man who thinks that he has more energy than machines. This male chauvinism drives him to despise women and think that he is not worth in his society. An honest statement that describes his character makes him change his residence.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, he pays a lot of attention to bad comments about him and this makes him leave his community to stay with a gorilla. He meets his death at the zoo after staying there for some time and realizing that even gorillas do not want his company. His primitiveness is shown when he is disturbed by a negative comment from a girl and also when he said that he would blow up things while working with the firemen. The climax of his archaic behavior is when he decides live in the zoo with gorillas because the world had turned against him.

Conclusion Glaspell and O’Neal have successfully managed to show how gender stereotypes and traditions affect human life. They have used different ways to show how people perceive each other differently and this contributes to the problems they face in the society.

[supanova_question]

Specific types of behaviors associated with substance users or addicts and people suffering from various disorders Research Paper college admissions essay help

Identifying Behaviors As it would be observed, there are specific types of behaviors associated with substance users or addicts and people suffering from various disorders or diseases. This paper identifies some of the varied behaviors that would be observed through a diversity of disorders and social problems affecting humans today.

For the purpose of this subject, this paper has featured a number of topics through which the issue of behavior across various disorders and complications is examined.

The key topics featured in this paper include depression in cancer patients, tourette’s disorder, opiate dependence in heroin users, control and coping of chronic insomnia, sex differences in recovery of PTSD patients, changing automatic behavior through self monitor, decision-making and perfectionism in OCD patients, and attention bias and memory bias for negative words used casually.

Depression in Cancer Patients Cancer is a serious health problem which is characterized by uncontrolled growth or multiplication of abnormal cell tissues in the human body. This is arguably one of the most serious health problems that are known to trigger serious cases of depression among the global populations today, especially on the victims.

Cancer is usually characterized with a prolonged and painful medical attention whereby surgery becomes a looming likelihood in all grounds. These, when coupled with the uncertainty of the disease and its unpleasant symptoms, would be serious issues that are likely to expose cancer patients to serious depressive disorders. Depressive disorders in cancer patients would normally occur as a result of immense stress.

This may happen due to the thought of the traumatic disease and its many complexities (Trask, 2004). Some of the common stressors and emotional upheavals associated with victims of cancer include things such as the fear of death, changes in self-respect and body image, and sudden interruption of one’s life plans. In this case, features of depression in cancer patients would be similar and incoherent to the various behaviors associated with the disease.

The common behaviors of depression that would be associated with cancer patients would include, but are not limited to, lack of concentration, memory lapses or disturbances, withdrawal from favored activities, appetite and sleep disturbances, and excessive anger.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In most cases, cancer patients would tend to find it hopeless for them to do the things they fancy in life, probably owing to physical and emotional pain of the disorder. This attitude contributes to lack of interest in life, thus exposing the patients to suicidal inclinations, among other serious effects of uncontrolled depression.

Tourette’s Disorder Tourette’s Disorder or Tourette’s syndrome is a disorder that affects the nervous system. This rare disease is characterized by multiple constant tics. According to Leonard and others (1992), the symptoms of Tourette’s disorder are likely to occur after five years of age, but not later than ten years.

At this stage, the victims experience mild, simple tics in the face and arms among other specific parts of the body. These embarrassing conditions would tend to increase in variety and frequency as time passes by, thus becoming disruptive to normal life activities of the victims.

This variation in frequency and variation normally comes with age, whereby the severity of the disorder is observed to lessen with the advancement in the victim’s age. Tourette’s Disorder is associated with a number of behaviors as it would be observed through activities of daily living.

For instance, the victims would portray attention problems, especially in matters involving education and knowledge. Symptoms of obsessive-compulsory disorder would also be common with people suffering from this disorder. This makes the victims harbor unreasonable thoughts, obsession, or fear that they have to manage through ritualized activities in order to reduce the looming anxiety which comes with this disorder.

Other complex behaviors linked to Tourette’s disorder include pinching, kissing, touching behaviors, sticking out of the tongue, and making of obscene gestures. Most of these features and behaviors can be diagnosed through a comprehensive evaluation of a child’s social, psychological, and educational performance. Other effective ways of diagnosing such behaviors is through thorough family and medical assessment or examination.

Opiate Dependence in Heroin Users Heroine or diacetylmorphine refers to an opiate drug which is generated from morphine. Regular use of diacetylmorphine presents high chances of addiction to its many users across the world. Heroine is arguably one of the most abused drugs in the world. According to current statistics by the UN, the global usage of heroine ranges between 15 and 21 million people (Mark et al., 2001).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Specific types of behaviors associated with substance users or addicts and people suffering from various disorders specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are various ways through which heroin is abused, and these include smoking, snorting or sniffing, and direct injection into the bloodstream using syringes and needles. Chronic use of this psychoactive drug , however, can result to physical dependence of the substance.

This is a condition whereby the bodies of the users become used to its presence that they cannot do without it. In medical terms, this condition is well termed as opiate dependence, and is characterized by the users’ inability to stop taking the substance. Opiate dependence in heroin users is associated with a cluster of behaviors.

For example, users would often display a strong desire to take the substance, no matter the efforts they apply in an attempt to avoid them. A physiological withdrawal state is also common among heroine users whenever they try to reduce or terminate its usage.

More importantly, opiate dependence is known to contribute to progressive neglect of alternative interests in life among heroine users owing to the addictive effects of the drug. Persistent drug seeking tendency and preoccupation with the interest to obtain the drug are other common behaviors that are likely to occur in heroin users as a result of opiate dependence.

Control and Coping of Chronic Insomnia Chronic insomnia is a serious condition which is characterized by disturbed sleep or the inability to get enough sleep in the night. This sleep disorder is classified into three groups which include transient insomnia, acute insomnia and chronic insomnia. Some of the common behaviors associated with this kind of disorder are habits such pre-sleep arousals, frequent wakening in the night, poor sleep habits, and early rising in the mornings.

Another common behavior associated with this disorder is an inclination to daytime sleep as those affected try to compensate the long hours of staying awake over the night with a daytime’s rest.

If left to persist, this habit could result to lowered productivity in the workplace since the people involved are likely to spend much of their time battling with sleep on their desks, rather than concentrating in work. As Morin, Rodrigue and Ivers note (2003), violent behaviors are also common with people suffering from chronic insomnia, probably as a result of excessive feelings of restlessness.

Pharmacologic treatments and psychological-behavioral treatments which incorporate the use of cognitive behavioral therapy are some of ways that have proven effective in the control of the sleep disorder (Currie et al., 2000). The most common behavioral treatments for insomnia include cognitive therapy, stimulus control therapy cognitive, and sleep restriction therapy.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Specific types of behaviors associated with substance users or addicts and people suffering from various disorders by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Cognitive therapy is a form of intervention whereby victims get to learn about the development of positive beliefs and thoughts regarding sleep. Stimulus control therapy incorporates the creation of a resting environment which is likely to promote sleep and rest. Sleep restriction therapy would be in form of a program which has been designed with the aim of limiting time spend on bed to ensure people are able to get enough sleep and rest throughout the night.

Apart from the treatment and behavioral therapies used in the control of this condition, it is also important for the affected persons to try coping with the condition through a number of ways. This can be achieved through the establishment and maintenance of healthy sleeping habits that would be applied in the course of the day and at night. During the day, for instance, victims should try to avoid nicotine, caffeine and alcohol, particularly towards the last hours of the day.

They should also try to avoid daylight siestas or naps, especially in the final hours of daytime. In the case of the nights, it would be a good idea for the sufferers to establish regular routine schedules for bedtime and waking up. They should also try to establish a cool and dark environment that would promote sleep in all aspects. More importantly, people should stay away from disturbing sounds during bedtime. Things such as white-noise machine and fans can be useful here, since they play a significant role in blocking out disturbing noises.

Sex Differences in Recovery of PTSD Patients The threat of exposure to trauma has been a part of human life since the beginning of life. In this case, the treatment of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) has been a common concept whose development over the time has raised much concern in the current world of medicine. As it would be observed from various studies, there is a number of sex or gender differences in the recovery of PTSD patients.

These differences are based on either societal or nonbiological aspects, and can be observed through a number of ways. To begin with, there is an increased prevalence of PTSD in women compared with the male. Another common difference here is in the presentation of PTSD, which is quite different for both men and women. While men are more likely to possess the associated features of impulsiveness and irritability, women would be associated with habits of numbing and avoidance (Holbrook et al., 2002).

However, although many disorders linked to PTSD would be common to both men and women, men are thought to present disorders that are characterized by comorbid substance use, while women develop comorbid mood disorders.

Another common difference here is in the treatment of the disorder itself through psychotherapy where there would be a significant difference in the drug therapy applied to treat people of different gender. It should be understood here that, there are no sex differences that have been identified as far as cognitive behavioral therapy treatment of PTSD is concerned.

Changing Automatic Behavior through Self Monitor The concept of self monitoring has emerged as one of the most effective ways used in changing human behavior nowadays (DeMarree, Wheeler

[supanova_question]

Aldi Supermarket chain Report college essay help online: college essay help online

Introduction Overview

Aldi is a global supermarket chain based in Germany (Aldi, 2013). Aldi was founded by Karl and Theo albretch brothers in 1946. The two had inherited a convenient store from their mother and created a chain of discount food shops Aldi first went global by opening a branch in Birmingham, United Kingdom. Currently, the supermarket chain owns more than 400 stores in the UK alone.

Aldi mainly deals in food and drinks, but also sells a range of health and cosmetic products and other low-cost domestic goods. The majority of the products sold by this supermarket chain are own-branded labelled plus a few non-branded products. This system enables Aldi to stock a variety of products similar to other general supermarkets but on a limited space (Aldi Group History, 2010; Fallon, 1987, p. 33; Mitchell, 1991, p. 5).

Report Purpose

The aim of this report is to carry out an in-depth analysis of Aldi supermarket chain using PESTEL framework and to explore the potential impact of each factor on Aldi, its policies and competitiveness in the UK market.

Aldi’s Industrial Analysis: PESTEL framework Political Factors

Aldi is a multinational corporation and therefore is greatly affected by the political and legal conditions of individual countries where it operates. The political state of affairs in the UK can be described as steady. The main focus of the current government is recovery from the global financial crisis (Hamilton

[supanova_question]

Quantitative and Analytical Techniques for Managers Report (Assessment) college application essay help

Relationship between the variables The dependent variable in the model will be the rate of growth of GDP while the independent variable is the amount of investment expressed as a percentage of GDP. A sample data for ten countries will be used to estimate the regression equation.

The regression line will take the form g = b0 b1 (1/Yi) ui when the ordinary least squares method is used. The regression line can be simplified to Y = b0 b1X

Y = rate of growth of GDP

X = Investment

The theoretical expectations are b0 can take any value and b1 > 0.

Regression Results

Variable Coefficients of the variable b0 Y – intercept 0.331859084 b1 Investment 0.186311941 From the above table, the regression equation can be written as Y = 0.3319 0.1863X. The intercept value of 0.3319 shows the proportion of growth in GDP that is not dependent on investment.

The value captures the variables that were not included in the regression analysis. The coefficient value is 0.1863. The sign is positive which implies that there is a positive linear relationship between growth in GDP and investment. An increase in investment by one unit leads to the growth in GDP by 0.1863 units. This can be shown by the scatter diagram shown below (Bazen, 96).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Evaluation of regression model

Evaluation of the regression model can be done by testing the statistical significance of the variables. Testing statistical significance shows whether the amount of investment is a significant determinant of the rate of change of GDP. A t – test will be used since the sample size is small. A two tailed t- test is carried out at 95% level of confidence.

Null hypothesis: Ho: bi = 0

Alternative hypothesis: Ho: bi ≠ 0

The null hypothesis implies that the variables are not significant determinants of demand. The alternative hypothesis implies that variables are significant determinant of demand. The table below summarizes the results of the t – tests.

Variable t – values computed t – α 0.05 Decision b0 Y – intercept 0.185875 1.9432 Do not reject Ho b1 Investment 2.924371 1.9432 Reject From the table above, the t – value of the y – intercept (0.1858) is less than the computed value of t (1.9432). Thus, the null hypothesis will not be rejected. This implies that the intercept is not a significant determinant of the rate of growth of GDP a 95% significance level and thus can be dropped. On the other hand, the t – value of the coefficient of the slope (2.9244) is greater than the values of t – tabulated (1.9432).

Therefore, the null hypothesis will be rejected and this implies that the investment a significant explanatory variable. Thus, investment is statistically significant at the 95% level of significance. The value of the intercept is not relevant when testing the significance of the regression variables. Since the explanatory variable is statistically significant, it implies that the regression line can be used for prediction.

R-square value

Coefficient of determination shows the amount of changes in the dependent variable that are explained by the independent variables. A high coefficient of determination implies that the explanatory variables adequately explain the variations in the rate of growth of GDP.

We will write a custom Assessment on Quantitative and Analytical Techniques for Managers specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A low value of coefficient of determination implies that the explanatory variables do not explain the variations in the rate of growth of GDP adequately. For this regression, the value of R2 is 51.67%. This implies that the amount of investment explains only 51.67% of the variation in rate of growth of GDP. It is an indication of a weak explanatory variable.

The value of adjusted R2 is superior to the value of the R2 since it eliminates the effects of the number of variables used in the regression model. It is because the number of variables has an effect of increasing the value of R2. Also, the value of adjusted R2 is low at 46.63%.

The value is quite low and it indicates that the regression model is weak. It is worth mentioning that the value of adjusted R2 is not always superior in all cases. The value is of significance only when dealing with a sample not a whole population as in the case above. Besides, it is also relevant in model building (Verbeek 87).

Testing the overall significance of the regression model

The overall significance of the regression model can be analyzed using an F – test at the 95% level of confidence.

Null hypothesis H0: β0 = β1 =, = βp

Alternative hypothesis H1: βj ≠ 0, for at least one value of j

The table below summarizes he results of F – test for the regression equation.

Variable F – values computed F – at α 0.05 Decision Regression 8.551948 4.71 Reject Ho From the table above, the value of F – computed is greater than the value of F – tabulated. Thus, the null hypothesis will be rejected and conclude that the overall regression line is significant.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Quantitative and Analytical Techniques for Managers by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More How to improve the model and results

First, the manager can remove the variables that are found not to be statistically significant. Also, the manager can improve the regression equation by more adding variables which are considered that can affect the regression equation. This is often done at the formulation stage. Finally, the manager can increase the power of the explanatory variables. Thus, the management can either use cubic or quadratic functions.

Theoretical Framework Justification Human Capital Theory

Fringe benefits and wage earnings are identified as the main components of compensation summation. However, fringe benefits are apportioned a larger share in the total compensation matrix due to the fact that their influence was experiencing a consistent growth over the last decade in the labor market.

These fringe benefits are classified as social security, unemployment compensation and employee’s compensation for every unit of labor given as indicated in the human capital theory. In classification, these fringe benefits assume the form of insurance benefits, paid leave, and legally acquired benefits to a worker for every unit of labor delivered against the revenue realized (Allen 10).

Labor Market Discrimination Theory

Type and form of fringe benefits are never universal. Rather, they are influenced by the type of industry in which labor operates, ration and occupational groups as indicated in the labor market discrimination theory. This is due to the fact that governments and other agencies have introduced laws and regulations aimed at pushing for higher and reliable compensation. In most instances, the blue collar employees have a larger share of the legalities, construed benefits than their counterparts in white collar jobs (Verbeek 77).

Job Characteristics Theory

In a bid to extrapolate this relationship, the Job Characteristics/Compensating Wage Differentials theory is a certain reason for the experienced growth over the sample space. Reflectively, the variables interacting within the parameters of this theory are leisure and income within the normal indifference curve.

Consequently, the resulting interaction becomes flexible to different bundles of budget constraints that might be present at each level of computation. Further, this theory asserts that indifference curve is a product of various fringe benefits and wage rates that interact simultaneously to yield same utility level for each worker. When all other factors are held constant, higher swing of the indifference curve indicates higher levels of utility (Kanbur 87).

Incentive pay theory

The requirement for intrinsic substitution as a component of the decision science aimed at managing the fringe benefits are peculiar in labor economics. In such case, the foregone alternative would be forfeiting leisure related savings for health and pension needs which are characterized as basic for every worker.

The adoption of this thought is influenced by the fact that basic needs are more critical than the secondary wants in the matrix of fringe benefits. Besides, the long term effects of purchasing the basic needs are greater than those opting to acquire secondary needs upfront. Tax advantages to employers, scale of economies, and efficiency are major factors that led to the growth of fringe benefits (Koning 137). Therefore, as fringe benefits increase, the workers’ utility increased in the same ratio.

Labor Union

When implanting compensation plans, it is important for the firm to consider the efficiency of each labor unit against the wage payments. These units should be quantified in line with performance targets and revenue accrued. In order to achieve this, introduction of regulatory agents, such as supervisors who work alongside the employees may be beneficial.

As explained in the labor union theory, this agent often influences wage prices to be very sticky downwards. In the sample, the unionized employees reported stable income and structured employment contracts as pull factors into their respective fields.

Regression analysis

The regression line can be simplified to take the form Y = b0 b1X b2X … bnX for n variables.

Y = rate of growth of GDP

Xi = All explanatory variables

Evaluation of regression model

A two tailed t- test is carried out at 95% level of confidence.

Null hypothesis: Ho: bi = 0

Alternative hypothesis: Ho: bi ≠ 0

The table below summarizes the results of the regression and a determination a test on whether they are significant or not.

Model B Standard Error Beta t Comments (Constant) .458 12.729 .036 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Statistically significant S 1.788 .456 .302 3.924 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Statistically significant EDUCDO -.669 4.367 -.012 -.153 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant EDUCHSD -2.154 3.459 -.074 -.623 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant EDUCAA -2.899 3.627 -.057 -.799 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant EDUCBA 3.618 3.353 .099 1.079 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Not statistically significant EDUCMAST .990 4.095 .015 .242 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Not statistically significant EDUCPHD -8.242 12.956 -.025 -.636 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Not statistically significant EDUCPROF 43.449 7.229 .259 6.011 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Statistically significant ETHBLACK -2.952 2.871 -.063 -1.028 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant ETHWHITE -.921 2.424 -.023 -.380 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant AGE -.357 .244 -.057 -1.464 Negative relationship with the depend relationship Not Statistically significant EXP .642 .134 .197 4.806 Positive relationship with the depend relationship Statistically significant From the table above, only three variables are statistically significant. All the others are not at the 95% level of confidence and thus can be dropped from the regression model.

R-square value

The value of R2 is 27.8%. This implies that the amount of investment explains only 51.67% of the variation in rate of growth of GDP. It is an indication of a weak explanatory variable. Also, the value of adjusted R2 is low at 26.1%. The value is quite low and it indicates that the regression model is weak. More variable statistically significant variables should be added to the regression model at the formulation stage (Allen 97).

Testing the overall significance of the regression model

The overall significance of the regression model can be analyzed using an F – test at the 95% level of confidence.

Null hypothesis H0: β0 = β1 =, = βp

Alternative hypothesis H1: βj ≠ 0, for at least one value of j

The table below summarizes he results of F – test for the regression equation.

Variable F – values computed F – at α 0.05 Decision Regression 16.892 4.71 Reject Ho From the table above, the value of F – computed is greater than the value of F – tabulated. Thus, the null hypothesis will be rejected and conclude that the overall regression line is significant.

Test for autocorrelation

Autocorrelation is a scenario where the error terms of different periods are related. It is often tested either graphically or by use of the Durbin Watson test. The Durbin Watson lies between 0 and 4. A value of 2 implies that there is no correlation between the variables. A value of 0 and 4 indicates a strong correlation. The values are summarized below (Kanbur 77).

Model Durbin-Watson Rounded off Comments (Constant) 1.796 2 No correlation S 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCDO 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCHSD 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCAA 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCBA 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCMAST 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCPHD 1.796 2 No correlation EDUCPROF 1.796 2 No correlation ETHBLACK 1.796 2 No correlation ETHWHITE 1.796 2 No correlation AGE 1.796 2 No correlation EXP 1.796 2 No correlation The information in the table below shows that there is no serial correlation in the data.

Heteroscedasticity

Heteroscedasticity is a scenario where the error term violates the assumption of constant variance. The standard error of the regression equation is 6920.717929. In the regression above, the robust standard errors are 8859.92728. It is an indication of the possible existence of heteroscedasticity (Koning 98).

Works Cited Allen, Michael. Understanding Regression Analysis, Alabama: Springer, 2004. Print.

Bazen, Stephen. Econometric Methods for Labour Economics, Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2011. Print.

Kanbur, Ravi. Labour Markets and Economic Development, Alabama: Routledge, 2012. Print.

Koning, Jaap. Evaluation of Active Labour Market Policies: Measures, Public Private Partnerships And Benchmarking, New York: Edward Elgar Publishing, 2007. Print.

Verbeek, Marno. A Guide to Modern Econometrics, New York: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Ethnography: An in-depth analysis Essay essay help site:edu

Human beings are complex creatures and as such are often hard to understand. Unlike animals, which possess standard behaviour that is often easy to explain, every person’s behaviour varies from another even when in the same environment and under the same circumstances.

There is a wide range of reasons for these variations, which include an individual’s personality, adaptability of different people to different environments, racial variations, cognitive ability, and the culture or norms practiced by different people depending on their area of origin.

Through the years, philosophers have developed theories specific to the aspects of human behaviour they attempt to explain. These theories have however proven speculative, as they exhibit some bias and therefore do not result in objective descriptions or conclusions.

Therefore, In a bid to understand these differences, scholars have taken to studying the workings of humanity and developing answers regarding their dynamics using facts as their basis. This in-depth study of human beings, their interactions, reactions to different environments, and their reasoning is known as anthropology (Wolf et al. 1994). Anthropology led to the development of various forms of research methodology.

With these developments came the birth of ethnography as a method studying and understanding human behaviour. Ethnography has evolved over the years to suit other fields of study such as sociology. It is a distinct way of looking at things and involves several different aspects as opposed to the common assumption that it only involves observation by being around the study subject. This paper aims at explaining what the process involves, its advantages, disadvantages and challenges, as well its purposes.

Ethnography is a data collection process that is applicable in different fields of study such as sociology, economics and criminology. The word “ethnography” is a derivative of two Greek words, “ethnos” which translates to “people” and “grapho” which means, “to write”. The focus of this process is the collection and recording of detailed information about the activities of a selected group of people or community with regard to the topic of the study, which proves useful as the basis of any conclusion that develops thereafter.

In the past centuries, people studying various communities and their cultures would use a different approach. Ethnographers would form a thesis and then use the information they get from the study to support the thesis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The result of this move was the formation of a conclusion that has its basis on the ethnographer’s bias and was consequently more subjective than objective (Mead 1928). However, studies conducted today take the inverse approach. The information collected is usable in the formation of an opinion instead of serving as supportive facts to an opinion that is already existent.

In conducting the process, the ethnographer usually observes his or her study subject from a distance and records the activities depending on his or her topic of study. The purpose for maintaining distance from the study subject is to avoid disruption so that the subject continues with activities in the normal and natural environment.

For instance, an ethnographer researching on the jazz music culture will in a jazz club and observes the activity of people in and around the club. Some of his or her concerns would be the history of the music, the kind of people that frequent the club, the instruments used, what happens on days when music other than jazz is played and when the club closes, among other things. The observer writes down this data for later evaluation.

However, in order to get a personal feel for better understanding of the subject, Interviews are also applicable in order to obtain the subject’s point of view. Sometimes video recordings are necessary for later reference. Surveys are also common as they provide comparative views for an objective conclusion.

However, such surveys are conducted as part of the ethnography, regardless of the fact that they are regarded as an independent form of data collection. The period of data collection ranges from a few months to a few years. Generally, this period is lengthy but it contributes to the conciseness of the entire process.

The information collected in a study is applicable in different forms of presentation including graphs, scatter plots and analytical writing (Philipsen 1992). In the early days, ethnographers wrote most of the records of field studies in the form of narratives that are similar to entries made in personal journals (Mead 1928).

This was the most efficient method available at the time, as people carrying out the study would immerse themselves in the cultures they were studying in order to obtain first hand accounts of the dynamics those cultures comprised, without the advantage of modern technology such as video recorders.

We will write a custom Essay on Ethnography: An in-depth analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This method of study is holistic in nature for it encompasses all aspects of a given subject including the subject’s history, geographical surroundings, materiality, and social interactions and welfare. It serves as a way of forming conclusions from the point of view of the subject instead of the application of universal premises that result from biased assumptions (Bentham 1907).

The benefit of this holistic nature is that it makes the same data collected applicable to almost every field as long as the subject of study is the same, i.e. the group being studied (Ember

[supanova_question]

Contemporary Issues in Corporate Social Responsibility Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Ethics in Corporate Social Responsibility

Conclusion

List of References

Introduction The business world is getting more sensitive and very competitive. Given the definition of a company, it would be right to say that a business unit is an entity, a person who can be viewed independently as a member of the society. It therefore, has an obligation to ensure that it participates in the normal developmental projects that other members of the society are involved in. The manufacturing companies are the leading polluters of the environment.

The retail stores are also adding to this pollution. Wal-Mart for instances, wraps its products with plastic papers which are poorly disposed and turn into menace in our environments. Many of the manufacturing firms emit the greenhouse gases into the environment, causing massive pollution (Keinert 2008, p. 116). They therefore, have great responsibility to the society. It takes away a very important item which it must find a way of compensating in order to ensure success.

There are a number of ways through which a firm can give back to the society. Corporate Social Responsibility is one of the most important activities for most of the corporate businesses in giving back to the society. It is a kind way of appreciating the fact that the community is important.

It is a fine way of telling the society that the firm appreciates its support. This way, the society will come to the realization that it is acknowledged by the firm. This would create trust and a close tie between the community and the firm (Majer 2011, p. 64). It is one of the best ways of making a firm part and parcel of the community.

This way, the community would not view the business as just a simple business unit out for pure gains in profits. They will see the firm as one of their own and will feel obliged not only to offer it any assistance and protection it may require, but would naturally be turned into a pool of loyal customers. Asongu (2007, p. 53) says that corporate social responsibility cannot be avoided by any firm that hopes to succeed in the market.

Coming up with an appropriate corporate social responsibility in the contemporary society is one of the biggest challenges in the twenty first century. The cultures of societies around the world are varied. For a firm with an international outlook, there is a serious need to develop a strategy through which this process can be made a success.

Corporate social responsibility can be taken from many fronts. There are different activities that a firm can do as a corporate social responsibility. However, what may be appreciated by the American society may not be the same thing that the people of the United Arabs Emirates appreciate. This is not only because of the cultural difference between the two countries but also the difference in economic status.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The United States is a developed country. Some of the activities that a firm may do in this country may fail to make any significant impact to the country’s population, but may mean a lot in another country (Kline 2010, p. 62). The biggest huddle will be for a firm to precisely determine what would be needed in each society. This would call for a deep understanding of the society not just from the economic terms, but also the socio-cultural and political fronts.

This paper seeks to reflect on contemporary issues in corporate social responsibility

Ethics in Corporate Social Responsibility Corporate social responsibility is taking a new approach in the contemporary world. The emergent of professional practitioners and corporate citizens is changing the approach given to corporate social responsibility in the society today. Ethics has been introduced in corporate social responsibility.

Ethics has got three facets. The first form of ethics is descriptive ethics in which moral standards differ from one society to the other. The second form of ethics is normative ethics; it describes the norms that are accepted in one society but are denounced in another society. The third form of ethics is analytic ethics which fosters the idea that the level of morality is comparative. Business ethics is a combination of all the forms of ethics discussed above (Bird 2007, p. 221).

Business ethics is defined as the assessment of the manner in which people or organisations are expected to conduct themselves in the field of business. To be specific, business ethics assesses the various limitations that hinder an individual or organisation from satisfying the self interest, or realizing huge profits when the activities of the individuals or the businesses influence each other.

Corporate social responsibility comes hand in hand with business ethics. Business ethics is concerned with the various ethical principles or ethical problems that occur in the field of business. In addition, business ethics checks on the behaviour of the business or the behaviour of the various stakeholders that run the business.

Ethics play the role of moderating the ethical behaviours that cannot be governed by the government’s laws (Weiss 2011, p. 23). The government normally uses laws in order to constitute the required business ethical standards; business ethics on the other hand are used by businesses to set up standards of behaviours that are not captured by the government’s laws. The development of business ethics has been enhanced by the rise of big business entities that do not pay attention to the welfare of the surrounding community.

We will write a custom Essay on Contemporary Issues in Corporate Social Responsibility specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Business ethics refers to the moral principles that govern the operations or regulations of a business. There are certain sections of business ethics (i.e. ethics concerning advertising or promotion) that connect with marketing ethics. Business ethics can be analyzed under the framework of value-orientation by looking at the various values that the morals infringe. In addition, the stakeholder-oriented approach also provides a framework for analyzing business

Business ethics of an organisation always change over a period of time with the changing environment that people live in. According to Manoj (2012, p. 78) business ethics is considered as a form of corporate social responsibility.

This is because it creates an environment in which a firm will behave responsibly to the society without being forced to do so by law. Large companies or corporations normally want to include such ethical behaviour in their CSR programs since they believe that when they do any charitable work to them, their efforts won’t be in vain.

Firms are forced to come up with an ethical organizational culture within its system. Ethical business culture normally brings to the fore their business ethics so that they can exempt themselves from the various scandals that normally occur in the business environment such as, financial crises or mismanagement. The ethical business practices of a firm normally manifest the philosophy of the firm (Urip 2010, p. 37).

The main goal of business ethics for a firm is to ensure that there is a positive relationship between the firm and the society within which it operates.

Business ethics should not be violated as its violation disregards the main goal of the business. Some of the ethical issues that are contained in the business ethics include: the interests and obligations of the company, employees, surrounding community and shareholders or stakeholders. Other issues in this context include: legal framework, CSR policies, marketing ethics and the political climate.

Conclusion Corporate Social Responsibility is one the most current strategies of marketing a firm. The market is so competitive that any misstep by a firm would lead to its automatic fall. Corporate social responsibility comes in as a way through a firm can show its concern to the society’s well being.

In such competitive markets, it is very important that this firm comes with strategy that would make the firm stand out among the rest, as the preferred firm that is able to understand the needs of the society. This should be based on the contemporary theories in this field. The firm can engage in various charitable activities in the society that may involve giving out financial support to the members of the society.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Contemporary Issues in Corporate Social Responsibility by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Environmentally, the firm may get involved in such activities that would ensure it is seen as an agent of pollution-free environment. Socially, the firm should not only ensure that its employees working conditions are bearable, but also make the society appreciate the importance of respecting the rights and freedom of every member of the society.

List of References Asongu, J 2007, Strategic Corporate Social Responsibility in Practice, Green-view Publishers, Lawrenceville.

Bird, A 2007, Team structure and success as related to cohesiveness and leadership, Journal of Social Psychology, 103(2), 217-223.

Keinert, C 2008, Corporate Social Responsibility as an International Strategy, Springer, Heidelberg.

Kline, J 2010, Ethics for International Business: Decision-Making in a Global Political Economy, Routledge, New York.

Majer, C 2011, The silent killers of productivity and profit, T D, 65(2), 62.

Manoj, K 2012, Corporate social responsibility: Contemporary issues in India, Adhyayan Publishers

[supanova_question]

The Web Site for Online Journalism Report a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Aljazeera

BBC

ABCNews

ESPN

Egypt Daily News

Conclusion

Introduction The Web represents the future of journalism, and mainstream media houses have realised this point. The Web is a relatively cost-effective means of distributing information than the traditional printing press and physical deliveries. This is reporting of news on real-time through the Internet. Therefore, the Web site for online journalism must meet some quality standards of a good Web site.

This is a short report about four international news Web sites and one local Egyptian news Web site. It looks at the contents and types of news (sport, business, and politics), the accuracy, the design of the Web site.

Aljazeera Aljazeera is an international news Web site that presents round-the-clock news to visitors on the site. The site provides news from various parts of the global like Africa, America, Asia-Pacific, Central and South Asia, Europe, and Middle East.

The Web site presents news on current affairs, opinions, business, sports, weather, in-depth analysis, human right issues, and other scheduled programmes. Aljazeera Web site has a great amount of illustration. At least every news item has a graphical presentation because such graphical presentations can have a significant impact of the audience.

The Web page has a good colour in the background that makes texts easy to read. Moreover, the background is not crowded.

The texts are not too small and crowded, but are evenly distributed within the page to explain the image. The Web site displays latest news in capital letters.

Every title in the page has a link. However, the audience must put a mouse on the heading in order to know that the link works, i.e., there is no “click to read more” sign. However, a click on the title may lead to the main story to take the reader further to ‘sub-stories’, which relate to the main story (this is the case with most of the contents in the in-depth section). The site does not have any dead links, unclear navigation, orphan pages, and unwanted scroll bars.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The page graphical presentations are easy to load, are useful to the site, and fit within the screen. This site does not use animations. However, the section marked as ‘IN PICTURES’ has running images through, but they look professional.

Generally, the Web site has a good design. The site provides various ways of contacting the organisation. However, it has social media integration (Twitter and Facebook). It also has a mobile version because smart devices and tablets are responsible for the growing Web traffic. The site lacks any security icon.

BBC The BBC has been the benchmark for international journalism. From the BBC Web site, the audience can listen, watch, and read news. Moreover, there are also constant updates. The site provides science, sports, documentary, society, blog, and other categories. It has abundant resources for the audience. The news items are current and accurate.

The background is clear to allow for readability of the texts. Texts appear in clear blue and light grey colour against a white background. Thus, readers can easily read them. The BBC Web site uses small letters to display latest news from the globe. Texts are organised below the main story.

Titles in the page also act as links, which viewers must click in order to read, watch, or listen to a story. The BBC Web site uses a blue colour to differentiate the headline and the caption of the news. All the links are working, and there are no dead or orphan links in the site.

Navigation is easy because there are various categories of news e.g., sports, weather, business, health, environment, and other areas of interests. All these items fit within the Web page.

The site makes extensive use of graphics for main stories. Moreover, it also presents some features in forms of illustration. However, graphic reporting plays a major role in this Web site. There are no animations in this Web site.

We will write a custom Report on The Web Site for Online Journalism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The BBC Web site has a well-integrated graphic design. All texts, snaps, and images fit within the site. Moreover, users do not have to scroll various segments in order to gain access to an item.

The BBC Web site has a mobile integration platform, live news, videos, and connected TV among others. There are also social media links. It also has extra links for FAQs.

The BBC Web site design has rich contents and meets qualities of an international news standard Web site with multiple languages for various viewers. Contact details are readily available.

ABCNews ABCNews is a part of the go.com. It provides the latest news items alongside video and audio messages. The format is clear and usable for the audience. Moreover, subscribes can get news alerts via their e-mails and mobile gadgets. The contents are real events.

The Web site has a clear background that allows text readability. It makes the use of white space in the background.

Texts in this Web site are mainly headlines with links to the main news item. The blue and black texts are visible against a white background.

The Web site links are working, users can navigate various pages of the site from the sections and headlines provided. The site is easy to scroll because users only use the side bar to scroll the entire content of the page. Moreover, the site has arranged its content into various categories. There are no inactive and dead links in this Web site.

The site has maintained its multimedia design. It has graphics, slideshows, audio links, and videos.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Web Site for Online Journalism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The site has multiple links, whit space, and multimedia approach to design. It also contains mobile apps and version for mobile devices, as well as social media links.

ESPN ESPN provides sports news, history and sports statistics. The site does not rely on extensive use of text on its dark red background. The news items are accurate sports news, suggestions, speculations, and opinions of contributors. It mainly relies on graphic journalism for reporting. It has maintained multimedia features. Moreover, there is a section with auto play (advertisement of mobile apps).

The design of the sight ensures that all items are within the Web page.

It has social media links and alerts. However, there are no visible security features for visitors.

Egypt Daily News This Web site focuses on local news from Egypt, Middle East, and world news. The reporting is accurate in current affairs.

The site is full of texts. In fact, most news items are in text format. The white background allows visitors to read the blue texts. The texts are small and may not be visible to some readers. However, this Web site looks crowded and cluttered with text. It contains more than enough. At the bottom of the site, there is a large white space with no content while the top side is cluttered with advertisements and headings.

The links are active and navigation is not difficult for the identified news item.

The site uses multimedia elements, but there are no animations and auto play elements. Graphic journalism also plays a critical role in this Web site.

This Web site requires improvement because of the cluttered presentation and small font sizes. Moreover, it focuses on several issues.

Conclusion The international news Web sites have strived to display professionalism on their sites. The news items are current, accurate, and reflect balanced coverage. They apply graphic reporting or journalism to present news items. There are words, illustration, and snaps. Graphic journalism acts as a backup for the text and audio reporting.

All Web sites have active links, which have easy navigation processes because of the sections and titles. Moreover, all these sites have social media links and alerts.

Some of these Web sites have strived to remain simple. As a result, they have integrated multimedia applications with caution. For instance, most of them do not have background music, flash, auto-play contents, and extraneous data that can slow down the page.

However, some Web sites have cluttered design in terms of graphic and text presentations, and the use of white space. Such sites require professional appeals. In addition, they also lack visible security signs.

Customisation of the content in some sites also allows visitors to choose a language of their choice.

However, these Web sites aim to achieve usability, aesthetic, and functionality of a professional Web site.

[supanova_question]

The Concept of Flexibility Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Reference List

Introduction Pilbeam and Corbridge defined flexibility as the ability of an organisation to adapt the necessary people’s inputs in terms of composition, size, cost and responsiveness in order to effectively meet organisational goals and objectives (Pilbeam

[supanova_question]

Conflicts of Sects, Cults and Religious Movements Essay essay help: essay help

Church-sect Theory Scholars have tried to classify religious movements by coming up with ways through which religious movements form. The most extensively employed categorization is the church-sect typology. The church-sect theory states that churches, sects, and cults form a continuum with declining effect on society. Groups that decide to break away from the mainstream religious organizations form sects.

Therefore, sects are never in good terms with other members of society because their members are perceived as perverts. This explains why sects tend to be in constant conflicts with society.

Sects are different from cults and religious movements because they do not have new teachings but instead deviates from the teachings of the mainstream church. Scholars utilize the attitudes of sect members and their level of involvement in society to determine their culture.

The church-sect theory is mostly used to differentiate sects from denominations and churches. The theory originated from the writings of Max Weber. As previously observed, the church-sect theory suggests that categorization of religions is a gamut that ranges from a protest-like sects to the symmetry preserving religion. The church represents the religious norms and standards of society.

In other words, churches are the custodians of religion in a certain society. In this regard, religious competition is not tolerated in such societies because it may bring about tension and mistrust. A perfect example of a church is the Islamic religion, which does give room for religious freedoms. Unlike sects, churches claim universality meaning that each member of society should be included.

Moreover, churches enjoy monopolies implying that they always try to eliminate all forms of competitions. In fact, the church has the endorsement of the state. State organs, such as the military, the judiciary, and the executive support it. During state functions, churches will always be invited to offer prayers and spiritual guidance.

Denominations are also different from sects but almost similar to churches. Just like churches, denominations are always in good terms with the state and may even influence the government to implement its policies. Unlike churches, denominations tolerate theological diversity.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This means that members are free to criticize the beliefs of a particular denomination. Unlike sects, members are not involved so much in its affairs. However, the level of involvement is intent as compared to churches. Sects are new religious groups that are established by disgruntled individuals.

They always come up with new teachings, claiming that the mainstream church does not provide freedoms and openness. Sects are differentiated from denominations because low class individuals form them. For instance, sects can discourage their members from wearing jewelry and expensive ornaments that are often associated with the reach. After their establishment, sects take three major paths.

One of them is dissolution path. This happens when members come to the realization that they cannot achieve their objectives by following the teachings of the sect. Another path is institutionalization. This happens when the sect is forced to embrace the features of the denomination in order to comply with the law. The third path is the development into a denomination. This happens when a sect finally becomes a denomination.

Religious Conflict Conflicts in the church are evident in all parts of the world. It is noted that all religious groups experience conflicts. For instance, Hindu, Islam, Christianity, and other traditional religions have been faced with serious conflicts. A number of factors cause these conflicts.

If some individuals tend to control the affairs of the church, conflicts would be inevitable. In India, the Hindu religion experienced conflicts because the son of the rajah tended to control the affairs of the mainstream religion.

The leader was accused of favoring his relatives in the appointment of priests. In China, a different religious belief referred to as Taoism emerged to oppose Confucianism mainly because of personal differences. In the bible, the apostles differed over some issues.

For instance, the apostles of Jesus differed from the apostles of John over baptism. The apostles of Jesus believed that baptism would convince the followers to embrace the teachings of the bible.

We will write a custom Essay on Conflicts of Sects, Cults and Religious Movements specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For the apostles of John, they believed that an individual had to repent before being baptized. The apostles of Jesus believed that an individual had to believe before being baptized. This means that repentance and belief were the causes of disagreement.

In the modern religion, there is an existing conflict between Roman Catholic and Protestantism. Catholic believes that people should be loyal to the church because the pope is the representative of Jesus Christ on earth. The central act of worship for Catholics is the Mass.

Grace is provided through the seven sacraments. Even though Protestantism concurs with Catholic over a number of teachings, the main conflict centers on the bible.

Protestants believe in the New Testament and have four major convictions. One of the beliefs is that an individual should relate directly with God as opposed to using priests. Moreover, the bible should be perceived as the word of God. Protestants observe that God works through miracles.

[supanova_question]

Online Media Products and Services Case Study essay help online free

Napster is an online music store that was developed as an online file sharing service. Originally, Napster concentrated on sharing of music files coded in MP3 format. This service was pioneered by Shawn Fanning, and it was aimed at sharing music files among users.

This marked a revolution in the music industry, thereby forming a platform on which online music services are based. It emerged as a powerful promotion tool for various artists and bands including the Dispatch band. Dispatch band is an American independent band that was formed in 1996.

Previously, the band had neither experienced formal promotion nor radio play. Through Napster’s peer to peer file sharing services, the band promoted its music to higher levels. As a result, the Dispatch band toured and performed in many cities, which they had never imagined before (Biagi, 2012).

The most significant aspect of Napster file sharing services is the active involvement of the audience. In this respect, many users or audiences were actively involved in receiving and sharing information. Napster technology facilitated easy sharing of music files in MP3 format among the users.

In regards to Dispatch band, display of their music in Napster enabled the band’s music to reach many audiences. This was attributed to Napster’s interface that was user friendly. This allowed easy downloading of music copies that could have been hard to get.

This included old songs, concert songs, and even the recordings that had not been released. In addition, the majority of users enjoyed downloading and trading music at no extra costs. In addition, Napster allowed users to create their music profiles where they could compile their own albums.

However, users chose the music on the basis of their values, beliefs, culture, background, experiences, interest, and education. Through this strategy, users could develop their social constraints of reality (Croteau, Hoynes, and Milan, 2012).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the contrary, the influence of the active audience on media can lead to harm. First, it can lead to the users narrowing and limiting themselves to certain dimensions. For example, users may isolate themselves and relate with only those whom they like.

Through Napster, users may isolate themselves in sharing music to certain people or groups like the Dispatch band. Secondly, group polarization can be a common occurrence. This takes shape where a group with views attracting much attention tends to absorb even the minority. The Dispatch band’s popularity amongst the majority triggered its influence to the minority (Croteau, Hoynes, and Milan, 2012).

As far as isolation of individual users is concerned, online media play a significant role. This can lead to various adverse effects. However, this is not common for all online media companies. As mentioned, the success of the Dispatch band group was attributed to Napster’s online services.

This portrays that Napster did not contribute to isolation of users since the Dispatch band music reached many users prompting widespread tours and concerts. This shows that it contributed to bringing togetherness amongst the users. Despite the challenges, Napster ensured diversification of ideologies that promoted social construction.

With respect to isolation, online media can overcome this challenge as in the case of the Dispatch band. The Dispatch band had no prior promotion or radio play that could have influenced polarization. Therefore, no dominant position influenced users towards them. Instead, it was at free will because the group was not formally known (Biagi, 2012).

References Biagi, S. (2012). Media/impact: An introduction to mass media. Australia: Wadsworth Cengage Learning.

Croteau, D., Hoynes, W.,

[supanova_question]

Media and Technologies as Agents of Socialization Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

In the modern world, cloud computing has reshaped the usage of the web, as well as the storage of data in most companies. Cloud computing is a specialized technology that runs sites such as Facebook and Twitter. Furthermore, the new technology helps in the manipulation of files obtained from Google docs and Gmail.

In the field of information technology, cloud computing would mean a network of computers. These computers are used as service-oriented tools. Their major role is to transmit software and information. Websites can only be displayed in computers and servers.

However, cloud technology is different because it uses information from computers as a collective virtual computer. This means that all applications have the capacity of running independently, without relying on servers or server configurations. In other words, cloud technology allows information to float around freely. This implies that the hardware is not important (Croteau, Hoynes,

[supanova_question]

Relationship between Childhood Understanding or Construction and Child Intervention Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Childhood construction is a vital aspect in determining child intervention within the child protection system. Parents possess a natural responsibility to intervene in their children’s lives. Childhood is recognized as an important status by the religious and secular world. For example, throughout the ages, religious teachings have encouraged parents to protect their children from any kind of harm (Shonkof and Meisels 68).

The need that adults posses of intervening in the lives of their children has shaped the way adults understand and construct childhood. There are many reasons why parents intervene in their children’s lives.

First, they view childhood as a stage in life that is defined by helplessness and vulnerability, hence making it necessary for them to offer protection to children (Shonkof and Meisels 70). Secondly, they view children as human beings who should enjoy their full human rights.

Thirdly, they believe that investing in children by protecting them is investing in the success of the future society (Shonkof and Meisels 71).

Many child interventions are determined by the construction of childhood as a vulnerable stage in human development that requires adult security. Ineffective construction of childhood promotes the idea that children as less knowledgeable and not deserving of power to make decisions.

Discussion The perspective of adults and the perspective of young people lead to different childhood constructions. However, the understanding of childhood in both cases determines child intervention within the child protection system. For example, young people consider abuse as the use of power by adults to control the behaviour of children and young people (Mason and Falloon 9).

As an intervention strategy, young people consider negotiation as an effective method of preventing child abuse. However, this may be ineffective because children consider the power to disclose cases of abuse as their right.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, they claim that it enables them to handle such situations appropriately (Mason and Falloon 9). Interventions based on the perspective of young people may be ineffective because young people may decide to conceal information regarding cases of abuse. Reasons for information concealment include intimidation and fear of harm by abusers.

Research and literature on child abuse is mainly focused on the perspectives of adults. Children are considered as not being knowledgeable and as such, their opinions are of little or no help in formulating intervention programs (Mason and Falloon 12). This assumption has led to the marginalization of children as potential contributors in child intervention policies.

The perspective has labeled child abuse as a social problem that should be solved by those in power and has contributed in aggravating the problem. Abusers are considered the abused, and the abused are considered the abusers (Mason and Falloon 9).

It is important to take children’s opinions and perspectives into consideration. For example, a study by Parton et al (1997) found out that children’s opinions are only used to supplement adult opinions in child abuse cases. Ignoring the opinions of children has led to poor intervention programs.

There is a distinct difference between children’s and adults’ perspectives of abuse. In order to provide effective intervention, it is important to consider children’s definition of abuse. Children define abuse as the subjection to adult power and control, emotional hurt, being looked down upon and being denied a chance to voice their opinions (Bagnato 46).

Children’s perspective is different from the adults’ perspective, which considers children as less knowledgeable and unable to determine what is good for themselves. This results in ineffective child intervention efforts.

Adults should allow children to participate in discussions, give them freedom to choose what they want and take time to explain the consequences of the decisions that they make on their behalf (Bagnato 48). In addition, the views of children should be prioritized in interventions, and decisions should be made with the interests of the child as priority.

We will write a custom Essay on Relationship between Childhood Understanding or Construction and Child Intervention specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A rights based approach constructs children as human beings who have rights that should be respected (Brambring et al 82). In addition, it considers children as important contributors to society and as investments that are the foundation of the future. The 1994 Geneva Declaration and the 1959 United Nations Declaration were some of the first laws that offered child intervention, although in an inadequate way (Brambring et al 85).

They constructed children as dependent on adults because they are weak. They clearly stipulated the value of children to society, and hence the need to protect them. The first law that applied the rights based approach was the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child (UNCRC).

The treaty comprises 54 articles that give children various rights. These rights include social, economic, political and cultural rights (Shonkof and Meisels 98). For example, Article 12 gives children the right to be listened to and the right to be involved in any decision making process that affects them (Brambring et al 89).

This leads to participation, a concept that recognizes children as part of the society, and as persons with rights that should be respected. The participation concept constructs children as human beings with rights and responsibilities. This perspective delegates certain responsibilities to children and other responsibilities to adults in order to strike a balance (James et al 52).

The rights based approach encourages children to participate in decision making through expressing their views and opinions. In most cases, adults make the final decision in cases that involve child intervention. However, these decisions should include the views and opinions of children. The participation approach has many benefits that make it an efficient approach to child intervention.

It helps children protect themselves because by voicing their opinions, they avoid situations that could amount to abuse (James et al 55). Children who are encouraged to express their views are able to challenge situations that abuse their rights. Therefore, children are less vulnerable to abuse when they are encouraged to express themselves (James 109). This approach is beneficial and effective.

However, it has many drawbacks. First, adults may take the rights of children lightly because many cultures place little value on the rights of children. Secondly, adults may refuse to give children power to participate in decision making because they believe that they know what is god for their children (James et al 58). Many adults feel that by giving children power, they encourage them to be disrespectful.

The idealistic perspective constructs childhood as a human development stage that is a period of innocence and carefree behaviours. This perspective stipulates that children should not be given adult responsibilities such as involvement in decision-making processes (James 122).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Relationship between Childhood Understanding or Construction and Child Intervention by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Proponents of the idealistic perspective discourage the participation of children in intervention decisions and as such, influence child intervention negatively. Failing to involve children in decision making discourages them from expressing their opinions on matters that are important to them.

This approach is ineffective because children’s understanding of abuse is different from adults’ understanding of abuse. As such, adults make decisions that do not align with the needs and rights of children.

Conclusion Childhood construction is a critical aspect in determining child intervention in the child protection system. Parents possess a natural urge to intervene in their children’s lives. Childhood construction takes several approaches depending on how it is understood. Many child interventions are determined by the construction of children as vulnerable, weak and in need of protection.

Other constructions view children as valuable human beings who have rights and form the foundation for the future. In order to provide effective intervention, it is important to consider children’s definition of abuse.

Some adults consider children as less knowledgeable and unable to determine what is good for themselves. This results in ineffective child intervention efforts that fail to fully protect children from abuse.

To ensure that child interventions are effective, adults should allow children to participate in discussions concerning child intervention, give children freedom to choose what they want, and take time to explain the consequences of the decisions that they make on their behalf.

The participation concept constructs children as human beings with rights and responsibilities. This perspective delegates certain responsibilities to children and others to adults in order to create a balance.

The approach encourages children to participate in decision making through expressing their views and opinions. Efficient childhood construction views children as valuable human beings with rights and in need of protection.

Works Cited Bagnato, Stephen. Authentic Assessment for Early Childhood Intervention: Best Practices. New York: Guilford Press, 2009. Print.

Brambring, Michael, Rauh, Hellgard, and Belmann, Andeas. Early Childhood Intervention: Theory, Evaluation and Practice. New York: Walter de Gruyter, 1996. Print.

James, Allison and James, Adrian. Constructing Childhood: Theory, Policy and Social Practice. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2004. Print.

James, Allison. Constructing and Reconstructing Childhood: Contemporary Issues in the Sociological Study of Childhood. New York: Routledge, 1997. Print.

Mason, Jan and Falloon, Jan. A Children’s Perspective on Child Abuse. Children Australia, 24.3 (1999): 9-13. Print.

Shonkof, Jack, and Meisels, Samuel. Handbook of Early Childhood Intervention. London: Cambridge University Press, 2002. Print.

[supanova_question]

“Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen” and “Declaration of the rights of woman and the female citizen” Essay essay help online

Table of Contents Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen

Declaration of the rights of woman and the female citizen

Differences between the two declarations

References

Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen This document was conceptualized by parliament of France during the French Revolution (Anderson, 1908, p.59). The document was categorical that men were born in freedom and deserved equal treatment. The document maintained that the rulers of government had a duty to protect and safeguard these natural rights.

The declaration stated that any form of political mandate was derived from the masses. Members of the French National Assembly appreciated the need to uphold and safeguard rights of man (Anderson, 1908, p.59). The declaration contained a list of natural and inalienable rights and privileges of man (Anderson, 1908, p.59).

However, the declaration was categorical that all rights and privileges demanded a sense of duty and responsibility.

This declaration ensured that the actions of the executive and legislative arm of government upheld the rights and dignity of man (Anderson, 1908, p.59). The declaration ensured that all citizens lived in harmony and in absolute respect for constitutional provisions regarding natural rights.

The declaration had provisions regarding the rights of man and the citizen. All men were born in equality and freedom. According to the declaration, any political undertaking should be geared towards preservation of rights of man. Those rights include: freedom, riches, and agitation for rights.

The nation was declared to be the sole owner of all sovereign powers and all individual power was to be derived from the sovereign entity (Anderson, 1908, p.60). Liberty was defined as the ability to do anything that does not contravene the rights of man.

The law was granted the ability to stop any actions that posed danger to the rights of men (Anderson, 1908, p.60). Law was meant to protect all people. All had a right to participate in making laws. Man could only be arrested or held in isolation after the law granted such provision (Anderson, 1908, p.60). The law allowed punishment for wrongdoing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This was to be carried out in accordance to established legal guidelines. Under the law, every man was held as innocent unless guilt was proven in a court of law. The declaration granted man the right to express opinion on condition that the opinion did not contravene law and order.

The right to opinion was considered a basic right of every man (Anderson, 1908, p.61). The rights of man were to be checked and maintained by an institution for the good of all.

Citizens were granted a right to remit taxes to the government at will, and for the common good. Society had to guarantee the rights of man and uphold them in accordance with the constitution. The declaration was clear on the right of man to hold and manage private property (Anderson, 1908, p.61).

Declaration of the rights of woman and the female citizen This document was authored by Olympe De Gouges in 1791. She argued that in the Declaration of Rights of Man and Citizen, the rights of women were not catered for (Levy, Applewhite, and Johnson, 1980, p.87).

She was concerned that women were not granted a right to vote, right to hold legislative office, and other fundamental rights that were granted to men.

Of importance to her, was the fact that women were not granted a right to education (Levy, et al., 1980, p.87). She argued that the Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen did not cater for the welfare of women. This reality prompted her to write the Declaration of the Rights of Woman.

She wondered why men were conspiring to deny women their rights (Levy, et al., 1980, p89). She felt that men were acting inappropriately and had no right to oppress women. She argued that men had no right to control women since women were intellectually equal to men.

We will write a custom Essay on “Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen” and “Declaration of the rights of woman and the female citizen” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More She demanded that women be allowed the right to hold public office. She argued that discrimination against women was the fundamental cause for wickedness in leadership (Levy, et al., 1980, p.91). She argued that women had rights and privileges that were natural and God-given.

The document held that woman was born in freedom and equal to man. Woman was also guaranteed the right to engage in political association. The document was very categorical that woman was entitled to equal treatment as man (Levy, et al., 1980, p.94).

Differences between the two declarations The two documents were different in terms of authorship and intent. One was authored to safeguard the rights of man. It was constituted by individuals who had the sole aim of propagating patriarchy. The Declaration for Rights of Man was concerned with the welfare of man.

Its contents were insensitive to gender concerns. The document propagated the view that men were superior to women. Women were not entitled to hold any form of power. Women were meant to remain at home. Women had no right to hold or manage property.

On the other hand, the Declaration for the Rights of Woman was authored by an individual who was disappointed by the contents of the Declaration for the Rights of Man. she protested the unfair treatment that was directed towards woman. She argued that all persons were born equal in freedom.

She felt woman was entitled to equal rights as man. Essentially, the declaration for rights of man was about the rights of man, while the declaration for rights of woman was meant to protest on the unfair treatment that was visited upon woman.

References Anderson, F. (1908). The Constitution and Other Select Documents Illustrative of the History of France, 1789-1907. New York: Russell and Russell.

Levy, D., Applewhite, H., and Johnson, M. (1980). Women in Revolutionary Paris, 1789- 1795. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.

Not sure if you can write a paper on “Declaration of the Rights of Man and the Citizen” and “Declaration of the rights of woman and the female citizen” by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More

[supanova_question]

Education in the third world Research Paper scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

One of the most notable forums for education funding in third world countries is the World Education Forum, which was held in Dakar. The meeting led to development of a framework for the achievement of education for all. It outlined the roles that civil society, international donors and national donors would play in the achievements of this objective (DFID, 2008).

Additionally, a call to action for the Millennium Development Goals in 2007 reinforced education funding from multilateral partners. Therefore, education funding in poor countries occurs through a myriad of donor avenues.

One of these routes is the UN fund as administered through UNESCO. Furthermore, several non governmental organizations also participate in the provision of these resources and they may have divergent objectives.

Prior to allocation of resources to third world nations, donors often analyze the political will of the concerned government and its ability to commit to the funds. Additionally, they assess them on the basis of their level of transparency or the education policies that exist.

These recipient governments need to cooperate with members of civil society in education matters, as well. However, not all donor organizations follow such rigorous procedures. Some of them may choose to donate funds to a country that lacks these qualities, but may invest in capacity-building among those nations (UNESCO, 2006).

Non governmental support for education in third world countries may come in the form of debt relief schemes, budget support (general or sector), pooled funds, or through specific projects. These projects may be carried out through recipient governments or through parallel systems. Sector wide support aims to create a budgetary framework for education.

General budget support systems mostly focus on development and implementation pro-poor reforms, of which education is part. Sector budget support caters to progressive sectors in governments, while pooled funds deal with programs or budget lines intended on tackling such problems. In addition, specific projects cater to the civil society and private sector education programs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These projects may take the form of bursary support or grants given to specific students in target countries. Additionally, some private schools may have difficulties in running their programs, so these NGOs can either subsidize their activities or assist in development of subsidies. Others may offer grants for schools in general.

In certain circumstances, non governmental or UN support for education has led to an increase in the level of funds dedicated to education in the recipient countries. It has also increased the number of children that access education. Therefore, education quality and accessibility have improved out of these efforts. Some poor countries have become more accountable because of UN requirements for transparency.

They have heightened their capacities for management of finances for education. These governments have also started dialoging with members of the private sector. On the flipside, analysts argue that financial aid from non governmental organizations or the UN leads to unsustainable development, as most receiving governments rarely think about scaling up their education strategies.

Underdeveloped nations may gain from aid for education in one year and loose it in the next year. Consequently, beneficiaries of educational policies may suffer. Since most funding organizations tend to focus on basic issues in education, a number of them may forget about other important sectors of education.

For instance many NGOs dwell on funding primary-education stakeholders in third world countries, yet a number of these beneficiaries will not have finances to go through secondary education.

Therefore, inequality persists in certain levels of education. Poor judgment on the part of NGOs leads to inefficient use of the aid and a dependency syndrome. In certain situations, little or no positive outcomes are reported after continual engagement with NGOs or the UN thus causing wastage of funds (GPE, 2012).

Countries and NGOs may fail to reach tangible outcomes when implementing donor programs for education because of a number of reasons. Sometimes the receiving country may allocate resources inefficiently. As mentioned earlier, many governments focus on primary education and leave out secondary education.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Education in the third world specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition to the above, some of the partnering institutions do not manage their recurrent expenditure efficiently. When NGOs fail to analyze an institution’s ability to do this, then they set themselves up for failure. Alternatively, they may find that budget management is a problem but may opt not to do anything about it.

One solution is teaching and monitoring those institutions’ cost containment efforts. Inefficient management of the flow of children in these programs may also be a problem. Sometimes repetition rates may be too high or examination policies unfavorable.

Certain learning institutions may not deploy teachers effectively, and this may lead to underperformance. Donor programs may sometimes fail to cost share or even recover costs during implementation of the scheme.

The ineffectiveness of donor funding for education in third world countries may also stem from failures on the part of the donors. For instance, if funding agencies do not align their objectives with priorities among national governments, then failure is bound to occur.

Issues of harmonization of donor efforts may also undermine outcomes. For example, a country may be receiving aid from over 30 NGOs, but those groups may not belong to any global organization.

Furthermore, they may not share information between one another, and this could lead to overlaps, and piecemeal outcomes. Donor organizations may sometimes fail to consider the number of parties that are already working in a certain country.

As a result, some nations may be overfunded while others might be underfunded. It is necessary to review the multiplicity of donor missions and commitment before plunging into such a program (Lewin, 2008).

Occasionally, failure of NGOs to achieve sustainable outcomes in education may stem from challenges on both sides of the divide; that is, the third world country as well as the donor nation. In certain circumstances, an NGO’s support may do more harm than good for a country’s education system.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Education in the third world by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More When aid leads to high transaction costs, then it is not worthwhile to pursue it. Third world countries need to have the audacity to reject assistance from certain aid agencies if this effect will arise.

When a country possesses several donating organizations, then it may need to coordinate its donor procedures. If multiple languages are involved and the receiving country has to deal with many projects, then the transaction costs may offset the benefits of the initiatives.

It is recommended that the UN, along with other NGOs, harmonize their efforts through donor-to-donor and donor-to-receiving country alignment. Governments should take ownership of development programs by planning and designing them.

These third world countries should create plans for tracking success. Additionally, both NGOs and aid recipients should create principles for mutual accountability, which will lead to better outcomes.

References DFID (2008). Core script one education for all: Cross-whitehall narrative. London: Department for International Development.

GPE (2012). Aid effectiveness. Web.

Lewin, K. (2008, February). Strategies for sustainable financing of secondary education in sub-Saharan Africa. African Human Development series, 136.

UNESCO (2006). Aid flows to education. Web.

[supanova_question]

Was the communists’ attempt at marriage reform in 1950s successful? Essay college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

China’s Revolutionary Marriage

The Marriage Law

Promulgation and Implementation

The Disappointment Stage

Urban Success

Marriage problems

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction This analysis focuses on the communists’ attempt at marriage reform in 1950s and the impact it had on the society. Importantly, the essay will detail the successes and failures that were witnessed as a result of the reforms.

In essence, the paper will explore how marriage was revolutionized and the overall impact of the reforms, which were initiated in 1950s. To achieve this objective, relevant information will be sourced from authentic books, written by reputable authors.

China’s Revolutionary Marriage In understanding marriage revolutionary under communism, it is essential to underscore the role of politics in the entire reform process, and how politicians used their positions to influence the society. For example, the People’s Republic of China was founded by students of Karl Marx, who believed that the marriage system was supposed to change based on the existing economic structure (Johnson 91).

As a result, the Chinese communists embarked on reconstructing their marriage system after the founding of the socialist state in 1949. Following the ratification of the new marriage law in 1950, the reforms were extended to the rest of the nation even though they had only been tested in the border areas.

As a result, most Chinese got used to the new freedom by the time the campaigns ended in 1953. Nevertheless, the process was met with some resistance, which triggered the need for a compromise between the state and its people as a way of attaining a balance (Diamant 30).

During this revolutionary period, the new marriage law led to certain changes, which ended up shaping the marriage system in the country. For example, romantic love was detached from considerations of matrimony and was replaced with the importance of loyalty to the party, matched political ideals, and revolutionary passions (Johnson 92).

Additionally, the state controlled the lives of its people through the introduction of the danwei. In this regard, marriage became a complicated process that entailed application, investigation, and registration.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The revolutionized marriage got rooted in the system, allowing its application to all Chinese across the country (Diamant 41). The following segments explain the marriage law of 1950 and how it affected the country’s marriage system.

The Marriage Law The marriage law was promulgated in May 1950, by the People’s Republic of China, a move, which was seen by leaders as a way of eliminating the old productive relationships and structure, to develop a socialist system of marriage. In other words, the law was aimed at liberating men and women from the bondage of the old system by conforming to a social system of development (Johnson 92).

Socialists believed that the old system was barbarian and backward. It therefore necessitated the introduction of a system, which would promote social productivity as well as the elimination of the old marriage system.

During the first year of the marriage reforms, communist leaders joined forces with the All-China Democratic Women’s Federation to study the new law. They carried out research on various issues by collecting data from different places.

They studied the marriage laws of the Soviet and border areas, Soviet Union laws, and regulations from the New Democratic Eastern European countries (Johnson 93). Importantly, the spirit of this group was in line with the past marriage regulations of the CPP, which included bringing to an end the feudal marriage system, promoting freedom in marriage, and equality between men and women, with more emphasis to the latter.

Promulgation and Implementation This occurred between 1950 and 1953 when the socialists focused on replacing the old system of marriage with the one, which they considered to be better for the people of China. Notably, the government launched propaganda that traversed the entire leadership, advocating for change (Johnson 115).

Several nongovernmental organizations joined the efforts of the state, including the All-China Democratic Women’s Federation, All-China Federation of Trade Unions, and the Central Committee of Youth League among others. The implementation period can generally be divided into two major stages; 1950-1951 and 1952-1953.

We will write a custom Essay on Was the communists’ attempt at marriage reform in 1950s successful? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Disappointment Stage Even though the purpose of the new law was to establish a different marriage system, which was inclined towards socialism, the state mainly focused on adjusting marital relations, during the first year of its promulgation. As a result, it adopted various methods, not only to reach the masses but also to influence those who were reached.

Some of these methods included but not limited to broadcasting, art performances, public discussions, and literature (Johnson 115). The state worked towards changing the attitude of its people towards traditional marriage. By the end of the first year, tremendous strides had been made across the country.

For instance, the All-China Democratic Women’s Federation was satisfied with the fact that most Chinese youths were able to challenge the decisions made by their parents, regarding marriage. Women also became more enthusiastic about the reforms as they managed to overcome the connection with the old system of social relationships (Hershatter 5).

Due to this understanding, there was an increase in the number of marriage lawsuits as men and women advanced their marital rights. Despite the fact that the new marriage law was affecting both men and women, most of the reported cases were made by women, indicating that majority of them advocated for change.

It is believed that the first year of promulgating the law led to massive public consciousness about the law across the country, which was the goal of the communist government. However, the achievements realized during this time did not meet the expectations of women in the country and those of the sponsoring political party.

There were various problems that were observed by women’s associations like the increase in the number of women who were prosecuted under the new law (Johnson 116). There were also rising cases of women committing suicide during the first year of promulgation, with Shadong registering 1245 female suicide cases, while 10,000 were either murdered or abused in marriage in Zhongnan.

The implementation of the new marriage law turned out to be ineffective because of feudal thoughts, which remained in the minds of some leaders that were in-charge of the process. This was known to the central government from the time the idea of implementing the law was conceived.

Based on this possibility, the Communist Party of China strongly condemned misconduct among its members upon the endorsement of the new law, in April, 1950. In order to deal with such cases and minimize their occurrence, the government was concerned with training and educating all the cadres, who were in-charge of various areas in the country (Johnson 118).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Was the communists’ attempt at marriage reform in 1950s successful? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Additionally, nongovernmental organizations like the Women’s Federation were equally involved in dealing with marriage cases as a way of helping the local courts in prosecuting criminals.

It is doubtless that the Communist Party of China was committed to the success of the law through all the mechanisms, which were available. For instance, the party dealt with its members who interfered with marriage freedom directly without allowing such individuals to be punished by civil and legal legislations.

During the first year of implementing the law, its success was uneven across the country as some cadres had played a significant role in eliminating traditional marriage customs while others had not taken the task seriously. While the state had taken a leading initiative in implementing the marriage reforms, it is worth noting that the process was not smooth in every region.

In some cases, the law was resisted as residents adhered to the old marriage traditions, thus interfering with marriage freedom, which was enshrined in the new law. This was however blamed on the cadres who were in-charge of the affected areas.

As a result, arranged marriages remained common, women oppression continued with an increase in the number of related suicide and homicide cases. Some of the supporters of the traditional practices remained cruel to women and became a stumbling block to their success. For example, several women were murdered as a result of abusive relationships in Huoqu County in 1950.

It was quite ironical that cadres in the affected areas took no action against perpetrators of such inhumane actions but went ahead to criticize the victims, arguing that the affected women were out of their mind, and deserved death.

Some judicial organizations were also blamed for the unsuccessful implementation of the new marriage law; they delayed sentences and gave tempered penalties. These sent a wrong message to men who did not fear serving a jail term of two years for killing their wives (Hershatter 97).

It is important to note that the Chinese traditionalists believed that marriage was a domestic affair, which was not supposed to be governed by the laws of the state. As a general principle, all marriage problems were to be addressed and settled within the family, through the leadership of senior members, related to the husband.

Consequently, the new marriage reforms initiated by the state were seen as external interference, aimed at imposing totalitarian control on the family. It was this misunderstanding that led to panic and resistance within the public domain as some people avoided the cadres.

Among other reasons, it was believed that most Chinese men were worried with the freedom for one to seek divorce as it was stated in the new marriage law. In this regard, there was total fear among men since divorce would imply lose of the daughter-in-law, property and the right to take care of children without any form of compensation.

This would therefore introduce one to eternal loneliness and total detachment from the family. Based on this analysis, it can be argued that the first year of implementing marriage reforms in China was characterized by mixed outcomes of success and failure, as there was uneven acceptance of the reforms around the country.

Urban Success Despite the uneven response during the first two years, the government remained determined to promote the success of the reforms. In 1953, it initiated investigations, aimed at revealing the implementation of the new law and the performance of cadres, through propaganda (Hershatter 332).

According to the state, there was need for cadres to change their approach in implementing the new laws by adopting educational principles rather than coercion, which was commonly observed in land reforms. As a result, this approach turned out to be successful, especially in urban areas (Johnson 138).

This was achieved through proper training of the cadres with a sole aim of equipping them with knowledge and skills, which were vital in changing the minds of people regarding marriage.

Other strategies, which were employed, included solving the problems of the masses by answering their questions, use of models, and removal of the offender’s name from the public. Moreover, the authorities focused on voluntary participation in propaganda programs as compared to compulsory involvement by the government.

By September 1954, significant achievements had been realized in Beijing, including a drop in cases of women abuse, as masses accepted marriage freedom and denounced trading of marriage (Diamant 178). High level of this acceptance was registered among urban residents, teachers, and university students. On the other hand, partial success was reported among industrial workers and people with rural background.

With regard to children, most of them were not confident enough to make independent marriage decisions (Johnson 139). Despite this success, most girls believed that money was the foundation of love.

They therefore put into consideration the economic status of the man before accepting marriage. Nonetheless, the issue of inequality remained a major problem as it involved the entire society, thus calling for more time in order to influence more people.

Marriage problems Before the success of marriage reforms was declared, Civil Affairs Bureau of the People’s Government of Beijing reported a wide range of problems, which were facing the reform process in September 1954. In fact, problems related to feudal customs were common in 1960s, as cadres and parents got involved in the marriages of their children.

Additionally, buying and selling of marriages became common as the bride’s family requested for monetary gifts and expensive feasts before accepting the marriage proposal (Johnson 150). Farmers were also neglected as potential husbands since they lacked enough cash.

Most authorities argued that these problems were as a result of discontinuity of the marriage law movement. Many leaders opted for regular propaganda education and government inspections in order to maintain the spirit of freedom in marriage.

Conclusion In general, promulgation of the new marriage law in 1950s was the first step that was undertaken by the CCP’s revolution agenda. Importantly, the transition between the customs of the state and the thoughts of people could not be achieved easily. It required constant effort in changing the perception of the masses.

Despite the fact that the marriage campaign across the country ended in 1953, investigations, which were carried out later revealed that the transition required a longer period of time, than three years (Diamant 209). Notably, the communists’ attempt at marriage reform in 1950s was partially successful.

This was mainly based on the approach, which was adopted by the state in turning the masses away from their marriage traditions. Importantly, the fear of divorce dominated the resistance of men towards marriage freedom, enshrined in the new marriage law. As a result, most of the efforts towards freedom in marriage were fruitless.

Works Cited Diamant, Neil. Revolutionizing the Family: Politics, Love, and Divorce in Urban and Rural China, 1949-1968. California: University of California Press, 2000. Print.

Hershatter, Gail. The Gender of Memory: Rural Women and China’s Collective Past. California: University of California Press, 2011. Print.

Johnson, Kay. Women, the Family, and Peasant Revolution in China. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985. Print.

[supanova_question]

The Aspects of the Research on the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres Research Paper essay help online: essay help online

The Cathedral of Chartres (Cathédrale Notre-Dame de Chartres) is located in France. The Cathedral is traditionally discussed as an example of the French High Gothic style, and the history of this building is associated with the 12th -13th centuries. The Cathedral of Chartres is famous for its remarkable architectural structure and unique stained glass panels and windows.

The Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres is one of the most interesting examples of the Cathedral’s stained glasses. The window consists of two parts which are dated from different centuries.

The window can be observed at the south side of the Cathedral, and its composition is made from twenty-four specific segments.

The upper part of the window was made during the 12th century, and the researchers accentuate it could be located in the earlier Romanesque building destroyed by the fire when the other part of the composition was created after the Cathedral’s reconstruction in order to meet the requirements of the Gothic style.

The research on the particular features of the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres was traditionally conducted in relation to the problem of the glass or window reconstruction with references to the peculiarities of the Romanesque and Gothic styles.

The most important investigations on the issue of the chronology and characteristic features of the glass design are developed by Frankl and Connick in the 20th century. The most interesting works of the 21st century are provided by Harris, Klein, and Horst Janson and Anthony Janson.

Harris focuses on the Belle Verriere Window in the context of the history of the stained glass; Kleiner, Horst Janson and Anthony Janson present general discussions of the design of the Cathedral of Chartres and its windows from the perspective of the history of art and design.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The specific features of the stained glasses in relation to the play of light and shadow with references to the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres are discussed in the article “La Belle Verriere of Infinite Variety” written by Charles Connick and first published in 1932.

The researcher pays attention to such characteristics of stained glasses as the possibility to change colors under the influence of sunlight. Thus, various lights affect the changes and vibrations in colors and tones, accentuating this or that part of the composition.

The public’s perception of the central figure of the Virgin Mary can change according to different lights. In his work, Connick also emphasizes the importance of flanking buttresses for creating the complex picture. Connick’s article is important for discussing the art impact of the stained glasses containing the definite religious meaning with references to the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres1.

In his article ‘The Chronology of the Stained Glass in Chartres Cathedral” which was published in 1963, Paul Frankl focuses on the particular features of the glass and windows’ reconstruction provided in the Cathedral during several centuries.

The reconstruction was organized in several stages, and it was caused by the fact of destroying the Romanesque cathedral in 1194. The researcher states that only four windows could be used in the further design of the cathedral which was worked out according to the principles of the Gothic style. The Belle Verriere Window was saved as the part of the Romanesque apse, and it was used in the design of the Gothic Cathedral2.

Providing the complete chronological history of using the stained glasses in the Cathedral of Chartres, Frankl also concentrates on the history of Belle Verriere Window’s reconstruction. This glass was inserted in Lancet 14 in the south part of the Cathedral.

Regarding the window’s design, the researcher focuses on the fact of adding such components to the glass as kneeling angels and the pictures of Temptations of Christ in order to respond to the significant dimensions of the traditional Gothic window. Frankl also pays attention to the peculiarities of combining the principles of Romanesque style with the elements of the Gothic architecture and design3.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Aspects of the Research on the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The idea to discuss the stained glasses not only as the objects of art and religion but also as the things depicting the philosophical notions is developed by Harris in her article “Stained Glass Window as Thing: Heidegger, the Shoemaker Panels, and the Commercial and Spiritual Economies of Chartres Cathedral in the Thirteenth Century” which was published in 2008.

The researcher analyzes all the examples of the stained glasses in the Cathedral of Chartres concentrating on the correlation of their symbolic significance with the aspects of Heidegger’s phenomenological philosophy. From this point, the Belle Verriere Window can be discussed as the image within the image which has the features of the cultic traditions.

The conclusions made by Harris are based on the analysis of the elements of the window’s central part created in the 12th century and of the surrounding components made by the masters of the thirteenth century. The researcher’s work is significant for discussing the religious and philosophical meaning of this piece of art with references to the history of creating its later components which depict the definite rituals4.

In spite of the fact today a lot of information about the particular features of the Belle Verriere Window’s design is presented in the works oriented to the history of the Western art in general, the authors of these books provide the important details on the window’s design with references to the history of the stained glass and based on the proper research in the field.

Thus, in his work, Kleiner focuses on the effects of flying buttresses and such elements of the design as the depiction of the young Virgin Mary on the red background with the dove of the Holy Spirit as the variant of interpreting the tradition5. In their turn, Horst Janson and Anthony Janson concentrate on the elements of painting with references to the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres as painting with glass and painting on glass6.

To conclude, it is important to note that the mentioned researches and works do not provide the complete discussion of the particular features of the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres in relation to all the aspects and details of the object.

That is why, it is necessary to work out the further research in order to discuss the issues associated with the point that the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres is the culturally and religiously significant art of design.

From this point, it is possible to follow the approach used by Anne Harris in her research and examine the components of the window’s pictures as the objects of the religious tradition and cultic elements with references to their colors and composition.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Aspects of the Research on the Belle Verriere Window of the Cathedral of Chartres by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Thus, the fact of combining the elements of the Romanesque and Gothic style to present the complex composition of the Belle Verriere Window should be discussed from the perspective of adding not only new elements to the design but also new meanings to the whole composition.

Bibliography Connick, Charles J. “La Belle Verriere of Infinite Variety”. Stained Glass Bulletin 27, no. 5 (1932): 1-6.

Frankl, Paul. “The Chronology of the Stained Glass in Chartres Cathedral”. The Art Bulletin 45, no. 4 (1963): 301-322.

Harris, Anne F. “Stained Glass Window as Thing: Heidegger, the Shoemaker Panels, and the Commercial and Spiritual Economies of Chartres Cathedral in the Thirteenth Century”. Different Visions: A Journal of New Perspectives on Medieval Art 1, no. 9 (2008): 1-30.

Janson, Horst Woldemar, and Anthony F. Janson. History of Art: The Western Tradition. USA: Prentice Hall Professional, 2004.

Kleiner, Fred S. Gardner’s Art Through the Ages: The Western Perspective. USA: Cengage Learning, 2008.

Footnotes Charles J. Connick, “La Belle Verriere of Infinite Variety”, Stained Glass Bulletin 27, no. 5 (1932).

Paul Frankl, “The Chronology of the Stained Glass in Chartres Cathedral”, The Art Bulletin 45, no. 4 (1963), 319.

Paul Frankl, “The Chronology of the Stained Glass in Chartres Cathedral”, 319.

Anne F. Harris, “Stained Glass Window as Thing: Heidegger, the Shoemaker Panels, and the Commercial and Spiritual Economies of Chartres Cathedral in the Thirteenth Century”, Different Visions: A Journal of New Perspectives on Medieval Art 1, no. 9 (2008).

Fred S. Kleiner, Gardner’s Art Through the Ages: The Western Perspective (USA: Cengage Learning, 2008), 349.

Horst Woldemar Janson and Anthony F. Janson, History of Art: The Western Tradition (USA: Prentice Hall Professional, 2004).

[supanova_question]

History of Somali Piracy Crises in 2009 Case Study college essay help: college essay help

Somali has stirred up and attracted global interventions to address various problems that have a common origin. Among many problems resulted from Somalia piracy, its coastline is more pronounced. Case problems do not give answers but gather different opinions, which should be integrated to come up with the best remedy.

The paper will outline two forms of case problems in relation to how a natural resource would dynamically relate with human activity. This will show how different interactions would result in highly negative impact both nationally and globally.

Case problem could be in the form of a given situation that would require different opinions. Consequently, it could be in the form of a report prepared and presented to be reviewed by a government official to see its relevance and seek for possible solutions (Gardner et al, 2008).

Somali piracy crises in 2009 led to devastating effects in different sectors both nationally and globally. The case study is a typical example of the interaction and dependency that exist between human activities and natural environment. Despite the fact that humans are in control of the environment, their interaction can result in impacts that cannot be predicted.

The Somali coastline has many shores so fishing industry is well pronounced in the region. Political instability in 1991 was associated with unregulated fishing and dumping of waste along the coastline by foreign states. Uncontrolled fishing was associated with trespassing and increased minor crime rates later transformed into major piracy attacks (Beeton et al, 2006).

The piracy crises affected social, political and economic factors in Somalia and other states. Military deployment by twenty four countries was done with the aim of suppressing piracy. The most directly affected organizations adopted tolerance approach.

For example, shipping factories avoided the routes that had a high risk of piracy. Ships sailed at a higher speed when around Somali, that was a strategy associated with increased expenditure on fuel.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The London conference held to tackle piracy issue considered collaborative approaches in reduction of the threat. Long-term solutions discussed included international interventions that would donate funds to ensure that state boundaries would be under tight security (Daly, 2007).

The threat of security was specific on the Shabab terrorists that had both long-term and short-term impacts on the entire world. Recently, Kenya has succeeded in suppression of the threat that involved military action deployment in Kismayu where the Shabab culture is rooted.

Eritrea has been reprimanded by the neighbor states due to the postulations that it supplied Somali with weapons (Garnaut, 2008). Interventions should be addressed towards reducing the influence of Eritrea and boosting the efforts of Kenya and Somali in overcoming the Shabab.

Food insecurity as a result of maltreatment from the Shabab claimed lives of about 80000 residents through famine and drought. International organizations have stepped in with relief aid for the victims. It should, however, be noted that this form of relief should not be overemphasized so as to reduce dependency.

Sustainable and long-term interventions like income generating activities need to be encouraged among the residents so as to solve the problem permanently. In the business field, interventions would include adoption of international monetary fund.

Credit facilities allocation in Somali would positively impact many fields both locally and globally. Collaboration with pirates would involve diplomatic actions that would settle the long dated dispute between Somali and foreign states. Adoption of this strategy would mean that Somali would voluntary stop piracy. Consequently, the foreign states would stop dumping waste along Somali coastline (Daly, 2007).

References Beeton, RJS, Buckley, KI, Jones, GJ, Morgan, D, Reichelt, RE

[supanova_question]

A History of the Cuban Revolution Essay custom essay help

The Cuban Revolution was an organized revolt led by Fidel Castro. The main reason behind the revolution was to overthrow the dictatorial regime of Fulgencio Batista. Fidel and his army men initiated the revolution in the year 1952. This was after Fulgencio Batista seized power following an election.

Fulgencio had been the country’s president from 1940 to 1952. The president decided to cancel the 1952 elections after realizing that he would lose. Batista decided to grab power and remained the country’s leader until the end of the revolution in December 1958 (Thomas, 2008).

After decades of unemployed and poor leadership, the people of the Cuba wanted their country to be democratic and successful. Some of these people included Fidel Castro, Ruz Raul Castro, Alberto Bayo and Che Guevara.

Fidel Castro and his men attacked various camps and cities to overthrow Batista’s regime. Throughout the revolution period, Castro used both large and small armies against Batista’s armies.

In 1958, Batista and his team realized that Fidel was definitely winning the battle. They decided to loot everything and fled. After seven years, Fidel and his team continued to fight without surrender. In early 1959, Guevara and his men captured the city of Havana.

It was victory for the revolutionists thereby making the country free. Historians have argued that the revolution was necessary because it brought new changes and better governance in the country. The revolution helped the people fight a dictatorial regime that had oppressed them for years (Chomsky, 2010).

The Cuban Revolution resulted in new governance and management in the country. There are certain good aspects realized at the end of the revolution. On the other hand, the revolution resulted in certain bad aspects as highlighted in the discussion below.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After Castro became the president, there were new reforms and progressive ideas that improved the living conditions of the people. The Communist Government decided to introduce some new laws. These laws provided equality for women and Black Cubans.

The government also improved medical facilities and communication in the country. Historians have agreed that the end of the revolution brought new aspects that favored the population of Cuba (Thomas, 2008). For instance, the government improved the quality of health by constructing more medical institutions and facilities.

With improved education, more professionals were able to provide quality health services in the country. The revolution marked the end of inequality and discrimination in Cuba. The people become free after the revolution. The people became aware of their liberties and rights.

The president emphasized on good foreign policies for countries in Africa. The African foreign policy helped different countries in the continent gain their independence from the colonialists.

It is acknowledgeable that the new government improved the quality of education in Cuba. As well, the level of prostitution decreased due to new policies and creation of new jobs. These aspects made Cuba a successful nation than it had been during the time of Batista (Chomsky, 2010).

On the other hand, the revolution resulted in several bad aspects. For instance, many people died during the period of the revolution. There was no freedom because of the insecurity created by the revolution.

After several years, the Communist government dishonored the rights of Cuban people. The other negative aspect of the revolution was the lack of democracy. The new regime became autocratic thereby limiting the rights and democratic liberties of the Cuban people.

We will write a custom Essay on A History of the Cuban Revolution specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References Chomsky, A. (2010). A History of the Cuban Revolution. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Thomas, H. (2008). Cuba or The Pursuit of Freedom. New York: Da Capo Press.

[supanova_question]

The Facts about Religion and Its Historical Development Report (Assessment) custom essay help: custom essay help

Religion is the worship and belief in a supernatural power, especially a god or gods. Different people belong to different religions depending on their beliefs and ideologies. Most of the religions practiced in the world today began over 2,000 years ago. From the course materials, various ‘facts’ have been identified about religion and its historical development.

The first fact about religions during the pre-1500 period is that they formed an important part of human culture. During the period, religion and culture were two elements that united people in different regions. People depended on gods for revelation, healing and spiritual guidance (Lecture Notes). They did not visit a doctor or specialist for healing or revelation.

The second fact is that no one can judge whether a given religion has the right beliefs or not. All the major religions have their own unique beliefs and faiths. The outstanding fact is that human beings cannot decide whether the views, teachings and beliefs of the religions are wrong or right.

This explains why there are differences in these major religions. The other important discovery is that members of a particular religion place their faith in that religion alone (Lecture Notes). This fact has made religions very complicated to understand. Human beings are free to make their own decisions about faith and beliefs without the influence of other people.

The third fact about religions during the traditional world is obtained from the book The World: A Brief History: Combined Volume by Felipe Fernandez-Armesto. During the period, most of the civilizations were promoted by these ancient religions. During the traditional world, religious practices brought people together thereby promoting development.

This made it easier for them to work together and promote social development. Architects wanted to build long-lasting churches and mosques. As a result, the world began to civilize slowly by slowly (Fernandez-Armesto 52). Most of the ancient civilizations are linked to the people’s religious practices. These religions led to the establishment of modern systems of education and leadership.

The other fact from the book is that all the major world religions began during or before the Traditional World. These religious groups have retained their religious practices and ideologies for very many years. During the time, people from different religious groups could not coexist freely.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Individuals belonging to different religions habited different geographical regions during the traditional period (Fernandez-Armesto 57). The traditional world occupied the entire world until 1500 when things began to change. The traditional world was characterized by slow growth, lack of communication and poor living conditions. The world was also isolated due to geographical distances.

The BBC website states another fact that Christianity was the world’s biggest religion and faith during the pre-1500 period. The website goes further to say that the religion was founded on the views and teaching of Jesus Christ. Majority of Christians believed that Christ showed them the way towards eternal justice and peace (“Religion” par. 2).

Christians believe in the existence of one Supreme God, but in Him there are three elements: God the Son, the Father and the Holy Ghost. The believers worshiped in special houses called synagogues. The early Christians considered the Bible as the Holy Book. The Bible consisted of the New and Old Testament. This has remained the same even in the modern and present world.

Works Cited Fernandez-Armesto, Felipe. The World – A Brief History, Combined Volume. New York: Pearson, 2009. Print.

Religions 2012. Web.

[supanova_question]

Abu Dhabi Municipality Information Systems Essay essay help free

Management information systems are ways through which organizations utilize technology to manage workers and make appropriate decisions (Oz, 2009). They assist managers to collect and analyze data on diverse issues. They enable managers to obtain information on customers, staff, sales and production among others.

Information systems also assist organizations to control all business processes. Some of the well-known information systems are supply chain, customer relations, project management and human capital management information systems (Laudon, Price

[supanova_question]

Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited: Market entry Essay college admission essay help

Executive Summary Suncoast Gold Macadamias Limited is the leading macadamia product processing company in Australia. In an effort to maximise profit, the firm has incorporated the concept of product diversification. As a result, it has managed to develop a strong product portfolio.

On average, the company’s annual turnover amounts to AUD $ 30 million. Over the years, the firm has nurtured a strong base with regard to tangible and intangible resources.

Suncoast Gold Macadamia Limited has also developed numerous unique capabilities and core competencies that have contributed to considerable improvement in the firm’s competitive advantage. In a bid to deal with the problem of climate change, it is critical for the firm to formulate programs that would minimise its weakness with regard to decline in nut production.

As its target investment destination, Saudi Arabia presents numerous opportunities for the firm to exploit as illustrated by the country’s characteristics such as the wage rate, population size, economic growth, exchange rate, the political environment, and government policy on trade.

The firm will be required to develop effective competitive strategies to deal with the prevailing competition in the market to penetrate the market successfully. Some of the modes of entry that the firm can consider include sole-ownership, joint ventures, and exporting.

Of the three options, exporting is the most appropriate entry point into the Saudi Arabian market. In a bid to be successful in its market entry, the firm should conduct comprehensive market research to understand the market dynamics of Saudi Arabia. Upon entering the market successfully, the firm should consider adopting foreign direct investment.

Introduction Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited is a public company that operates within the Australian macadamia industry. The company was founded in 1985 and it operates as a cooperative.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Its core line of business entails production, processing, and supplying of high quality macadamias. Since its inception, the firm has been very successful due to incorporation of effective business and corporate level strategies (Suncoast Gold Macadamias 2010).

In an effort to attain its profit maximisation objective, the firm has adopted market expansion as one of its business level strategies. Suncoast Gold Macadamias Limited has successfully managed to establish itself in both the local and international market.

Currently, the firm ranks as the global leader in the macadamia industry. Despite its presence in the international market, there are some economies where the firm has not penetrated.

One of these countries is Saudi Arabia, which is currently an emerging economy according to business scholars. The purpose of this assignment is to analyse the market entry modes that Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited can incorporate in its international market entry strategy.

Ownership Over the past 28 years, Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited has undergone significant growth from being a small business establishment to becoming an international leader in the macadamia industry.

Currently, the firm has a substantial annual turnover of approximately AUD $ 30 million. More than AUD $ 21 million of the firm’s total sales are generated from exports, while the domestic market only accounts for AUD $ 9 million (Suncoast Gold Macadamias 2010).

Tangible resources Since its inception, the firm’s management has been committed towards establishing a strong competitive advantage. One source of the firm’s competitiveness is effective nut processing technology. The firm has implemented modern nut processing facilities.

We will write a custom Essay on Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited: Market entry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited has been conducting major plant upgrade by integrating state-of-the-art technology. In 2012, the firm purchased two machines of the most modern sorting technologies in the industry, which significantly enhanced the firm’s competitiveness.

For example, its output increased with 50 per cent (Pilcher 2012). In a bid to improve its competitiveness with regard to plant technology, the firm has also purchased a multi-scan machine.

The machine has made separation of bad and good nuts more easily in addition to separating nuts based on their weight and colour before cracking. The firm has also established a supplier network of 135 suppliers to ensure that its products are easily accessed in its domestic market.

Intangible resources In addition to tangible resources, Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited has accumulated various intangible resources. The management team appreciates that the firm’s success is greatly dependent on the effectiveness and efficiency of its human capital.

Employee development is one of the elements that the firm has taken into account and to achieve this, the firm has formulated a staff training and education program. The program aims at imparting new knowledge to employees.

In addition, the firm is committed to nurturing a strong relationship with its customers, suppliers, and employees (Suncoast Gold Macadamias 2010).

In its domestic and international market, the firm has nurtured a strong positive reputation due to its operational efficiency, provision of high quality services, and development of an all-inclusive client service, which has contributed towards development in the level of customer loyalty.

Capabilities The firm has developed numerous macadamia brands to appeal the diverse customer product needs. The firm has integrated the concept of value addition. The firm supplies different variety of macadamia products such as macadamia oil, chocolate coated, macadamia shortbread, and macadamia nuts.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Suncoast Gold Macadamias (Aust) Limited: Market entry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The firm has also developed sufficient capability with regard to packaging. Additionally, the firm ensures that its brands are packaged according to customer specifications. The firm has also developed the capability with regard to supplying fresh and high quality macadamia (Suncoast Gold Macadamias 2010).

Core competencies The firm’s success in an industry that is characterised y intense competition has arisen from development of effective core competences. One of the firm’s core competences relates to the provision of high quality macadamias. The firm ranks as the first macadamia company to attain internationally recognised quality within the industry.

The firm is also effective in quality management, which it has attained through assimilation of effective quality management systems. Suncoast Gold Macadamias core competencies also emanate from the high rate of innovation that it undertakes.

Its innovative ability has played a critical role in enhancing the firm’s competitive advantage. The firm utilises macadamia waste products by generating energy and thus it has managed to minimise the cost energy necessary for its operation.

Weaknesses The major source of the firm’s weakness is the high degree of susceptibility to nature. The firm has experienced a poor season due to bad weather over the past few years (The Australian Business Journal 2011). Bad weather adversely affects the firm’s profitability due to decline in the volume of production.

However, with numerous environmental conservation measures being undertaken by the government and other environmental stakeholder, the firm expects that climatic conditions will improve considerably.

Location advantage Saudi Arabia’s economy is mainly oil-based. The country has the largest proven oil reserves globally. Its rich oil reserves have played an important role in the country’s economic growth and development. In 2011, the country’s Gross Domestic Product (GDP) was estimated to be $676.7 billion, which is an increment from its $635.6 billion in 2010 (Index Mundi 2012).

By the end of 2011, it was estimated that the country would undergo a real GDP growth rate of more than 6.5 per cent. The country’s total population is estimated to be 28 million. Additionally, the country has a relatively low rate of unemployment. By the end of 2011, unemployment rate stood at 10.9 per cent (Index Mundi 2012).

The country’s snapshot shows that there is a high probability of Suncoast Gold Macadamias succeeding in its profit maximisation by entering in Saudi Arabia. The high rate of economic growth coupled with the relatively low rate of unemployment means that the country will experience an increment in per capita income.

Ultimately, there will be an increment in consumer’s purchasing power. The country’s high population means that the firm can increase its customer base by identifying relevant target customer group. The attractiveness of the country is also enhanced by Saudi Arabia’s recent ascent to the World Trade Organisation. Its ascent will present an opportunity for Suncoast Gold Macadamias to increase its customer base.

Customers Saudi Arabians are becoming more concerned with consumption of healthy food products. This transformation has arisen from an increment in cases of diabetes and obesity problems amongst the old and young. A report by Saudi Arabia’s Ministry of Health showed that the rate of diabetes in the country is approximately 30 per cent.

Some of the factors that have been attributed to cause diabetes include increased introduction of western diets to the country, adoption of sedentary lifestyles, and growth in the number of supermarkets. Growth in the level of awareness regarding the health risk of such food products will contribute towards change in consumer purchasing behaviour.

Therefore, the shift in consumer purchasing habits presents a high opportunity for Suncoast Gold Macadamias attracting more customers. Saudi Arabia is also characterised by a large number of middle and high-income customers and educated customers.

This customer category is the largest consumer of diet products such as the macadamia products produced by Suncoast Gold Macadamias. These customers are more concerned with the nutritional value and quality of the food products in their purchasing patterns (Al Swailem Consulting Group n.d).

Politics In 2011, the country experienced an increment in calls for speedy reforms with regard to governance mainly from intellectuals. However, the country has not experienced major incidences of political instability in the recent past compared to other Arab countries, which experienced the effects of Arab Spring in 2011.

The political stability being experienced in Saudi Arabia presents a good opportunity for Suncoast Gold Macadamia to enter the market. According to Klug (2006), a country’s attractiveness is increased by the prevailing peace and tranquillity due to political stability.

Government policy (taxes and tariffs) The Saudi Arabian government is greatly concerned with enhancing the country’s economic growth. Promoting foreign investment is one of the strategies that the government has adopted. A number of measures such as the abolition of taxes and trade restrictions have been implemented in an effort to foster foreign investment.

The government has designed the country’s economy based on free enterprise and thus no limitations on imports and exports of goods and services. This aspect means that Saudi Arabia has a favourable business environment for foreign firms (Al Swailem Consulting Group n.d.).

Wage rate For a considerable duration, the Saudi Arabian government had not imposed any minimum wage for employees. However, in an effort to deal with unemployment, the government recently instituted SAR 3,000 as the minimum wage (Al Swailem Consulting Group n.d).

Exchange rate The Saudi Arabian Riyal is relatively stable to most major currencies such as the Australian dollar. The current exchange rate of the Riyal to the Australian dollar is AUD $ 1 to 3.7 Saudi Riyal. This rate of exchange will make it possible for the firm to venture into the Saudi Arabian market more cost effectively for the firm will require a few AUD dollars to enter the market.

Competitor analysis In its operations, Suncoast Gold Macadamias will face intense competition from other confectionary companies operating in Saudi Arabia. Some of these companies include:

Al Nukaly International Trading Company: -This firm has been in operation in Saudi Arabia for a number of decades, since its inception in 1932. In its operation, the firm has developed a strong workforce of approximately 100 employees.

Bahadi Company: – Since its inception, this firm has established itself effectively in the international market. Currently, the firm has established an effective operational base in Saudi Arabia, the Middle East, and Africa.

Anwar Al-Mustafa: – The firm was established in 2000 and has over the past decade managed to penetrate the nuts industry in Saudi Arabia. It has also managed to develop a substantial financial base with its turnover estimated to be US $ 0.5 million.

Competitor threats The above-mentioned competitors pose a number of threats to Suncoast Gold Macadamias. One source of threat arises from the fact that these firms have incorporated the concept of product diversification in their operations. Some of the products that these firms deal with include nuts, dried fruits, coffee, spices, chocolate, nuts, bakery, candy, and crackers.

Consequently, the firms have managed to offer consumers a wide range of products. Ultimately, competitors have managed to develop a substantial level of customer loyalty. Therefore, Suncoast Gold Macadamias will experience a significant challenge in developing a substantial market base.

Suncoast Gold Macadamias opportunities Despite the intense competition in Saudi Arabia, Suncoast Gold Macadamias has a considerable competitive edge that will contribute to its success. One source of the firm’s competitiveness relates to its ability to produce high quality macadamia products. The firm has incorporated the concept of quality assurance in an effort to ensure a high level of food security.

Considering the increase in the degree of health consciousness amongst the consumers, there is a high probability of Suncoast Gold Macadamia attracting customers. This arises from the fact that its products have high nutritional values.

For example, macadamia oil is not in any way associated with the rise in cases of obesity. Additionally, the high population in Saudi Arabia also presents an opportunity for Suncoast Gold Macadamias to increase its sales revenue by employing aggressive marketing.

Modes of market entry Firms seeking to venture the international market should consider making effective strategic decisions on the mode of market entry to adopt (Agarwal

[supanova_question]

mgt481 mod 2 critical thinking essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

please use this draft to edit into a word document ( only page that needs full editing is the works cited page, also please properly cite and add the following source (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r_Wf532f5X4) finally please edit any in text citations as necessary, i will review it finally when i get it back in the form of a microsoft word document

[supanova_question]

Price and Quantity Adjustments for Australian Tourism and Hospitality Products Report a level english language essay help

Executive summary The Australian tourism and hospitality industry has continued to grow tremendously. Currently, the sector contributes significantly to the country’s GDP. Despite global threats such as terrorism and economic depression, the sector has continued to bolster impressive results.

However, with the growing competition from other countries such as South Africa, USA, and China, many factors need to be considered to gain a competitive edge. Price and quantity demanded are the principal guidelines to setting prices of facilities in this sector. As such, the country should endeavour to provide competitive prices as well as the right quantity to its domestic and international tourists.

Price and Quantity Adjustments for Australian Tourism and Hospitality Products

The impact on the market for Australian tourism products of a decrease in the price of tourism products in the United States

A decrease in the price of United States tourism products will have a significant effect on the demand for Australian tourism products. This will affect the demand curve of Australian tourism products. This phenomenon can be best explained using the traditional demand and supply curve.

Figure 1: Demand and Supply of Hospitality Products 10 50 100 150 200 250

Assuming the graph is representative of the current Australian tourism demand and supply trend, we can conclude that the quantity demanded of hospitality products is 100 units at a price of 15. This is, therefore, our Australian market equilibrium.

However, it is generally accepted that marketing, technological advancements, and pricing policies of competitors can easily destabilise market equilibrium. Nada and Sarath notes that since the United States and Australian tourism industry share a lot, any changes in market activities in one region, easily affect the other party1. By reducing the prices of its products, the United States will attract more tourist, local, and international, to use its affordable facilities. This will consequently reduce the demand for Australian tourism products, which will be viewed by many tourists as too expensive. In this case, services become substitutes for one another.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since the effect is price motivated, there will be a movement along the demand curve, but not a shift of the demand curve. The quantity demanded would thus, drop from 100 units to say 50 units. This drop will represent a downward movement along the demand curve.

These changes will influence quantity exchanged and price differently. To retain its tourism market, the Australian marketing authority may step in to reduce prices of its facilities. According to Singh, Australia being “one of the leading tourist destinations,” this option presents a good opportunity for curbing loss of market2. Otherwise, the Australian quantity will reduce. However, according to Tourism Australia, the reduction will not be very significant considering that international tourism only represents 27% of the country’s tourism earnings.3

The impact on the market for hotel rooms if the price of airline flights increases

Increase in flight prices affects the demand for travel negatively. Many people, even those who had planned for their trips, find it easy cancelling them when travel prices go up. In fact, air travel and accommodation demands are complimentary goods. Any change in the price of such a good affects the price of its complimentary good.

Figure 2: Demand for Accommodation

Increase in the cost of flight will affect the demand curve; it will shift to the left. As shown in figure 2, an increase in the cost of air travel leads to a decrease in the demand for accommodation. Dwyer

[supanova_question]

Foreigners Changing China Essay best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Historical overview of China

The influence of foreigners on industrial growth in China

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Most researchers are making attempts to link the industrial transformation in China to the developments of the 19th and 20th centuries. The most critical question to ask about the growth of industries in China is the country’s growth with the relations it had with other countries like Japan, the Soviet Union, The United States, and the United Kingdom among other nations.

The history of the transformation of China in various fields can be traced from the early years of the 19th century. The transformation of industries in China cannot be explored without talking about the role that was played by a substantial number of countries. There is a substantial amount of historical data that points to the fact that the course of development in China was greatly shaped by the activities of foreign countries.

Among these countries are the Great Britain, the United States, Japan, and the former Soviet Union. In this paper, it is argued that the growth of industries in China in the 19th and 20th centuries was significantly influenced by both positive and negative relations between China and other countries.

This paper explores the transformation of industries in China between 1830 and 1990. This period denotes a cut across two centuries, the 19th century when there were a lot of political developments in China and the 20th century, when the political upheaval was patterned by the pursuance of economic reforms that later saw China’s industrial triumph at the global level.

The paper centres on the influence of foreign countries, in particular the political and economic influence of foreign countries in the growth of industry in China for the mentioned period.

Historical overview of China The question that ought to be asked is how China has managed to attain the prevailing level of industrial growth and to what level other countries like Japan played a role in shaping industrial growth in China. As observed in the introduction, China is a country that has had a long history dating as early as the 16th century.

However, the current l level of industrial development in China can be traced from the 19th century. China had a lot of political issues in the 18th and 19th century, which impacted upon the development path of the country. The most critical thing to note is that China has had relations with different countries since the 17th century. Therefore, the interaction of these countries with China must have, in one way or another, impacted upon the industrial development in China.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One important element in the development history of China is the age of fragility that was experienced from the later years of the 18th century into the entire 19th century. The historical antecedents of the 20th century denote that China made contacts with a substantial number of countries, which shaped the political and economic developments in the country. It is important to note that the change in the political set-up of China in the mid of the 20th century is the main landmark in the industrial transformation of China.

According to Hays (para. 1), China attracted a number of foreigners in the ancient years, who later came to influence the pattern of industrial development. The ancient years denote the period between the 17th century and the 20th century. The contact between the Chinese and the British was not only based on colonial relations, but also on economic conducts with British companies. This also applies to other countries that began relating to China later.

The birth of the Chinese economy and industrial sector began with the penetration of Britain in China. The British staged its concession in one of the most commercially developed towns of Shanghai in the year 1842. This was followed by a French concession, which was set up in the year 1847.

Russians, Germans and the Japanese came in later, although they all came in before the end of the 19th century. By 1930, the population and industry in Shanghai had grown greatly, making it the largest trading town in Asia. This implies that the town had the capacity to attract a substantial number of foreigners from the Asian region and beyond, who were interested in trading activities (Hays para. 2-4).

The influence of foreigners on industrial growth in China One of the main developments in China that has given China a global attention is the rate at which Industrial transformation has taken place in the country. As observed earlier, China, just like a number of the influential economies in the world, has not grown devoid of interactions and influence from other countries.

While a substantial number of historical texts seem to focus on the comparison between the path of industrial growth of China and other developed countries, there seems to be a minimal number of texts focusing on the nature of changes in China’s industry from the 18th century. However, there are a number of historians who have focused on the factors that have shaped the economic changes in China over time (Bickers 29).

According to Bickers (29), the contemporary developments in China are highly connected to the recent and the ancient patterns of relations between China and other countries, for instance Britain. The question that ought to be asked is to what extent foreigners impacted on the changes in the industry in China from the early years of the 19th century to the industrial orientation in the later years of the 20th century.

We will write a custom Essay on Foreigners Changing China specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One of the most critical parts in the explanation of the economic changes in China is its contact with Britain. During the later years of the 18th and the entire 19th century, China was marked by a lot of territorial wars. The main areas of interest in these wars are that they depict the nature of relations between China and other countries. Between 1854 and 1950, a substantial number of Britons settled in China (Parsons 3).

The Britons settled in Shanghai, which later became one of the earliest centres to urbanize. The royal navy was bestowed with the responsibility of guarding Shanghai during the 32 years of British colonial control over Shanghai. The presence of the British in the country encouraged the growth of trade activities in the country, and by effect transformed the minds of the Chinese population that had been highly involved in war.

The Anglo Chinese trade is argued to have played a significant role in shaping the trading environment in China, which in turn encouraged the growth of industry and development in China. Trade was accompanied with the setting up of business bases and industries (Bickers 30-31).

The other critical areas in the history of industrial change in China can be traced in the activities of the 1920s and 1930s. This period is marked by the search for a world order after the end of the Second World War. During this period China was still under Maoism. Under the philosophy of Maoism, China went through a period of economic standstill.

While the size of industrialization in China has expanded greatly, beating the size of industry and economic magnitude in Japan, it still remains evident that Japan developed earlier than China. This is justified by the activities of the 20th century. Japan is often termed as one of the main aggressor countries in the Second World War.

The most vital question to ask is why Japan was termed as the cause of the Second World War. An exploration of history denotes the conquest of China by Japan in the early 1930s. China was rich in natural resources, like iron ore other minerals, which are vital for industrial development. The most critical area to observe in the conquest is the impact of the conquest of Japan and the effect it had on the industrial change in China (LaFleur 84-85).

According to Wong (60), China had a number of traditional industries that had prevailed for a long period of time. However, it is important to note that the influence of Japan on industrial growth in China can be explored from two perspectives. These include: the issue of destabilization of the ancient industry through the conquest and the encouragement of transformation from the traditional industry to modern industry.

Irrespective of the approach that is taken, there is a resounding linkage between the industrial transformation in China and the relations between China and Japan. Most of the traditional industries in China were agricultural-based. Prior to the conquest of 1937 by Japan, traditional industries were vital elements of the economy of most of the Chinese provinces. However, after the conquest, a significant number of changes were put in place in China.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Foreigners Changing China by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The realization of the country that more profitable and flexible industries could be developed in China became real. Modern craft industries were built out of the influence of the Japanese in the country. The conquest of China and the operations of the Japanese in the country necessitated a transformation from an agricultural market oriented economy to an agrarian commercial economy.

The commercialization feature was quite critical in the industrialization of the country. In spite of the defeat of the Japanese and the subversion of the conquest, the economy of China continued to commercialize, with the scale of the prevailing industries being broadened (Wong 67).

Apart from the involvement with China in the post-world war I period, Japan had also engaged with China in the late 1800s. The Japanese are said to have played a critical role in the development of Dalian. The Japanese took over the development of the town from the Russians.

This town was a major fishing centre in China that prevailed up to the later years of the 19th century. The Russians had begun by transforming Dalian to make it one of the deep-water ports in China (Weisl 5). By the 1920s, Shanghai, which was one of the largest industrial centres and towns in Asia, was already receiving a large number of foreigners besides the British who had settled in the region earlier.

The country received numbers of foreigners ranging into tens of thousands, who had fled away from the developments of the First World War. The European refugees were running away from the Nazism in Europe. The presence of such a population in Shanghai was a mark of the expansion of trade and industries arising from the commercial activities of each group of refugees who were residing in the town (Hays para. 20).

The main area of focus in the historical development of industry in China is the period of rapid industrial growth that was witnessed since the mid of the 20th century. Several questions are often posed about the approach of China to industrial growth and the level at which foreign nationals have played in China’s industrial change.

No one can doubt the observation that China is one of the countries whose industry transformed at a high speed in the last half of the twentieth century. However, a substantial number of people argue that the phase of the industrial revolution in China from the mid of the 20th century was largely based on the self-realization of the country and the subsequent implementation of effective policies by the Chinese government.

This observation is based on the fact that the policy of China during this period isolated the participation of foreigners in the local economy of China. This cancels out the issue of the influence of foreigners in the growth of the industry. Nonetheless, the foreign influence must be applauded for influencing industrial growth in China before the period of rapid industrialization (Nayar 19).

Conclusion China is one of the countries in the world that has had a long history of political and economic development. The influence of foreigners in industrial change and growth in China can be traced from the movement of the British in China. While the influence of foreigners in the growth of industry in China is appreciated, the most critical part in the history of China’s industrial transformation drives away the direct participation of foreigners.

Works Cited Bickers, Robert. “China’s Age of Fragility.” History Today 61.3(2011): 29-36. Print.

Hays, Jeffrey. Foreigners And Chinese In The 19th And 20th Centuries, 2008. Web.

LaFleur, Robert A. China: A Global Studies Handbook. Santa Barbara, Calif: ABC-CLIO, 2003. Print.

Nayar, Baldev. “The Geopolitics of China’s Economic Miracle.” China Report 40.1(2004): 19-47. Print.

Parsons, Timothy. The British Imperial Century: 1815-1914 : A World History Perspective. Lanham [u.a.: Rowman

[supanova_question]

The Life and Times of Sir Francis Walsingham Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Overview of the life of Sir Francis Walsingham

Work of Sir Francis Walsingham

Walsinghan and the development of intelligence

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The growth of nationalism in most countries and the establishment of national intelligence systems are highly based on the work of Sir Francis Walsingham. The field of intelligence has undergone several changes due to changes in the available modes of information flow, storage and communication. In spite of this, there are still a substantial number of pointers that show that the contribution of early resource persons is still valid in the contemporary exercise of intelligence.

This is a pointer to the fact that early contributions in intelligence were significant since they act as a basis on which the contemporary modalities of intelligence are built. Francis Walsingham is one of the earliest people in history who contributed greatly to the development of intelligence (“The New Encyclopaedia Britannica” 783).

Walsingham was born in the year 1532 and died in the year 1590. The question that ought to be explored is how significant Walsingham is in the field of intelligence in the contemporary times given the fact that his works in intelligence were accomplished before the year 1600. The modern changes in the practice of intelligence cannot totally stand without reference to the critical ancient works that were done in the field.

The contribution of Walsingham in the field of intelligence was based on the nature of work practices and tasks that he accomplished as he worked as the principal secretary to the British Royal Monarchy, Queen Elizabeth I (Budiansky 1-5). In this paper, it is argued that while Sir Francis Walsingham lived four centuries ago, his contribution is still highly valued in the development of modern practitioners in the field of intelligence.

This paper explores the life of Sir Francis Walsingham. Of relevance in the paper is the discussion of the nature of work and tasks that he was involved in and how they shaped the field of intelligence then and in the contemporary times. The paper begins by summing the life of Sir Francis Walsingham.

This is followed by a deeper look into the work of Walsingham, especially the work of Sir Francis Walsingham as a secretary to Queen Elizabeth 1. The last part of the paper carries comparative discussion of the works of Walsingham and the contemporary practices in the field of intelligence.

In this paper, several questions are answered. These are: What was the early life of Sir Francis Walsingham like? What led to the appointment of Sir Francis Walsingham as the secretary to Queen Elizabeth 1?

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What special work did Sir Francis Walsingham do in ancient England, which makes him an icon in the study of intelligence in the modern times? What were the shortfalls of Walsinghan as an agent and how did the full affect the development of intelligence? An exploration of these questions broadens the discussion, thereby making the paper elaborate on the subject.

Overview of the life of Sir Francis Walsingham As observed in the introduction, Sir Francis Walsingham lived more than four centuries ago. Walsingham was born in a large family of gentry. He was born in the year 1532 at Foots Cray. The father to Sir Walsingham was a lawyer. Walsingham was deceased of his father in 1534. His family was well connected.

The status of his family enabled him to travel in Europe after his university. Walsingham, studied at the King’s College in Cambridge with a set other Protestants, but he did not sit for a degree owing to his high social status as a protestant (“The New Encyclopaedia Britannica” 784).

At the age of 20 years, Walsingham started pursuing a course in law at Gray’s Inn, which was a top qualifying body for lawyers in England. This was in the year 1552, after he had travelled in different parts of Europe. He was a committed Protestant during the period of rule of Queen Mary I of England.

This made him to join other expatriates who had moved into exile in Switzerland and Italy. He returned to England after the death of Queen Mary I, who was heading the Catholic Church in England. Walsingham ascended in power to take the position of a coterie. He was charged with administering in the state of Elizabethan in religious issues, both at home and in the diaspora.

It is important to mention that his rise to power was highly backed by a group of people to whom he had been exiled with during the Reign of Elizabeth I. The most notable former exiles who backed him to power are Earl of Bedford and Francis Russell. He was first elected to the Elizabeth parliament in the year 1559. He was reelected to the parliament in the year 1563, but under a different constituency under the support Earl of Bedford (Hadden and Henry 112).

Walsingham got married in the year 1562 to a daughter of one of the top political figures in the United Kingdom, Sir George Barne, who was the Lord Mayor of the city of London between 1552 and 1553. His wife died two years into his marriage, leaving behind a son who was to be taken care of by Walsingham.

We will write a custom Essay on The Life and Times of Sir Francis Walsingham specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More He married another daughter of a political figure in the year 1566, who bore him a daughter. In the year 1967, two of the stepsons of Walsingham died out of a gunpowder accident, which occurred at Appuldurocombe. Walsingham championed the course for the Huguenots in 1958.

In his course, he developed close working relations with his predecessor in the Lyme Regis Constituency, Nickolas Throckmorton. Throckmorton was a former British Ambassador to France. To neutralize the schemes formulated against Elizabeth, Walsingham joined William Cecil in 1959. This was the beginning point for the recognition and a beginning of his carrier as an aide to the Queen of England (Fitzgerald para 1-2).

Work of Sir Francis Walsingham An exploration of the early life of Walshingham, as has been done, is a critical factor in noting the nature of developments that resulted in his appointment as the secretary to the Queen of England and later his works in fostering British intelligence as he worked for the Royal monarch.

The early life of Sir Francis Walsingham denotes an upheaval of events, which are argued to have shaped the life and career of Walsingham. According to Adams (60-61), the history of the work relations between queen and Walsingham, who was the Queen’s chief agent, is often complex. T

he complexity of the relationship is expounded by the manner in which Walsingham worked. Therefore, it is vital to unearth the nature of work relations between Walsingham and Queen to capture the various natures of work practices between Walsinghan and Queen and get insights into the role of Walsingham as the chief spymaster of the Queen of England (Hadden and Henry 112).

According to Fitzgerald (para. 1), Walsingham occupied a key operational position in the Queens court. This took place from 1573 to 1590 when he died. He is often cited as one of the main people who established the boundaries of conventional intelligence and began a revolution in intelligence tactics, which are still highly deployed by governments in the contemporary times by most agencies of governments.

The first rule of Walsingham in government came in the year 1567 when he was assigned to the role of breaking up a plan of assassinating Queen Elizabeth I, which is widely referred to as the Ridolf Plot. It can be said that this was a purely intelligence role and pointing to the latter role that he occupied in the Queen’s rule.

With the support of other agents, Walsingham managed to break up that plot, thereby freeing the Queen. A substantial number of people argue that this role made a turnaround in the working relationship between Walsingham and Queen (Fitzgerald para. 10).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Life and Times of Sir Francis Walsingham by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From the year 1578, Walsingham was sent on various missions in European nations by the Queen. These countries included France and Holland. This helped him in establishing strong contacts with Francis Drake. By 1854, he had developed an unveiling view that Britain needed to intervene in European conflicts; for instance, the conflict between Belgium and the Netherlands.

He also oversaw the establishment of a pro-Britain government in Scotland. After the year 1854, he spent most of his time preparing the country for war due to the escalation of conflicts in Spain. He carried with the espionage work till he died in the year 1590 (Fitzgerald para. 19-21).

According to The New Encyclopaedia Britannica (783), Walsingham found a lot of favor with the Queen, resulting in his appointment by Queen in 1570 to back up the Protestant Huguenots of France in their diplomatic standstill with Charles IX, who was the then King of France. He also succeeded in fostering the negotiation between Charles IX and the Huguenots. This resulted in his appointment as the Ambassador to France.

His appointment as the England’s ambassador to France was another great milestone in his life. It helped him to establish stronger alliances with the key political and religious figures, such as the King of France and the Huguenots who aided in the revolt against the Catholic Spain.

However, his work as an ambassador to France did not auger well with his career in intelligence. The main reason for this argument is that the revolt against the Catholic Spain led to the deaths of a substantial number of Protestant Huguenots, whom he was meant to protect.

This took place in what is referred to as the St. Bartholomew’s Day Massacre in Paris. While this was seen as a blow to his works as an intelligent jury, a substantial number of historians termed the St. Bartholomew’s Massacre as another critical event that streamlined the career of Walsingham in intelligence. This is explained by the developments that later took place upon his return from France in 1573 (Fitzgerald para. 10-13).

It is argued that the attempt to revolt against the Catholic Spain exuded more confidence in him by the Queen of England, who promoted him to become her principal secretary in 1576. Prior to his appointment as the principal secretary to the Queen, Walsingham was serving as the manager of England, managing both the domestic and foreign affairs for the Queen of England. His allegiance and service to the Queen was later recognized when the Queen awarded him with the title ‘Sir’ in the year 1577.

This was yet another turning point in the life and work of Wlsingham as it gave him more power and fame to discharge his work as the principal secretary to Queen Elizabeth I. The tittle meant that he could be more recognized in England, as well as other foreign states. He fully engaged in espionage and other pieces of intelligence work, working as the chief agent in England. Till his death, he was involved in a number of intelligence works, which established a high profile of British intelligence (Fitzgerald para. 14-18).

Walsinghan and the development of intelligence The question that ought to be asked at this point concerns the significance of Walsinghan in contemporary government intelligence. A substantial number of researchers argue that this can be explicated through a deeper look at his work as the principal secretary to the Queen.

An assessment of the rise of Walsinghan to become the principal secretary to Queen Elizabeth I show that Walsingham was a great strategist and a master of intelligence, a feature that was later to be replicated in the manner in which he discharged intelligence work for British (Adams 60-61).

The development of modern espionage work is highly attributed to Walsingham. The political status of England can be used to show the nature of security that the country had during the reign of Queen Elizabeth I. This gives a basis from which one can easily argue for the resounding works of Walsingham in fostering intelligence work.

According to Louis (184), Elizabethan England was one of the most advanced states in the ancient times. The state had a substantial number of things that it could boast of. During that time, the state was the main centre of trading activities in Europe. England produced Shakespeare and was beginning to establish colonies across the world (Louis 184).

According to Louis (184), England had a constricted military power, something that exposed it to constant dangers of being invaded by states that had proved to be militarily active during that period. These states included France and Spain. Compared to England and Spain, England was incapacitated in both the navy and the land military power, thus it could not easily withstand the power of the countries that posed threat to it.

Therefore, Elizabeth, the Queen of England, was forced to battle the enemies by using wits since he had no power to wage a physical battle against them. The battle of wits was one of the indicators of the deployment of intelligent tactics to neutralize the threat that was posed on England.

The main Weapon by Queen was Sir Francis Walsingham. Walsingham operated under the title of the principal secretary to the Queen. However, through his work Walsingham came out as a spymaster to Queen. One notable achievements of Wlsingham as a spymaster to the Queen was his ability to trump the Catholic states with a formidable force, which was stronger than the Spain’s armada espionage (Fitzgerald para. 16-18).

Therefore, it comes out that it is important to base on the political and religious status of states since these two were the main pillars of security at that period in history. Religious and political strife were a common source of tension and conflict between nations. It is argued that Walsigham invented the art, as well as science, which acted as a basic foundation on which modern espionage has been built upon.

The modern intelligence work is highly built around the development of spy agencies by governments, who check on the developments that are bound to threaten the security of the states. An example of the spy agency that has been developed in the world today is the US Federal Bureau of Investigations, which uses agents to spy on certain developments. Similarly, there are other espionage agencies that have been established in a substantial number of states in the world today.

The only main area of difference between espionage in the Walsingham times and the modern times is the applications of tactics by the agent. Modern espionage applies a lot of technology in advancing spy work, unlike in the past where these technologies did not exist. His espionage tactics led England under the leadership of Queen to become an empire.

One resounding thing in the modern government intelligence is the planting of agents in diverse regions. This is a tactic that was purely borrowed from the espionage tactics of Walsingham (Louis 184).

Mandelbaum (12) observed that the 16th century in the history of England marked the period of the emergence of science and reason from the dark ages, where there was a lot of reliance on superstition. During this period, there was a great challenge in the deployment of science in development since science coexisted with superstition. Superstition was rampant, thence, a great impediment to the development and deployment of science in intelligence.

There were close ties between the religion and the operation of the state, thereby making difficult for the state to eliminate the reliance on superstition as the means of predicting and reacting to events. Therefore, the deployment of science at this point in time was a highly remarkable development.

As observed earlier in this paper, Walsingham was able to apply science in his spy work. One resounding question here concerns the ability of Walsingham to deploy science in an environment that had minimal foundations in science. Walsingham is mentioned among the first people to advance intelligence work for the Queen of England.

The relevance of Walsingham in British intelligence is founded in the vitality of the information that he was able to gather and avail to the Queen. It could be said that his closeness to the queen was an additive factor for his recognition in the history of intelligence. While the connectedness of Walsingham with the queen cannot be ruled out, it is important for one to ascertain the way in which he got the attention of the Queen (Mandelbaum 13).

Mandelbaum (16) argued that Walsingham got attention by virtue of the activities that he had been involved in. The queen saw the potential of a great spymaster in queen out of the initiatives of espionage, which he had been involved in and the level of success that had been attained in the initiatives.

The Queen noted the potential of Wlsingham to execute national intelligence operations in England through his participation in domestic counterintelligence. Another thing that comes out here concerns the nature of spy missions that were launched and executed under the leadership of Walsingham as the chief spy agent of the Queen of England.

Upon his appointment as the spymaster for the Queen, he deployed a desirable level of creativity be deploying agents, as well as the utilization of personal knowledge in science to execute a number of espionage missions. Most of the spy missions that were established and managed by Walsingham turned out positive. He was able to arrange for foreign reports on all the foreigners who resided in England at that time.

The intelligence works of Walsingham are said to have withstood the occult nature of political times in which he was working. His ability to eliminate all forms of threats through intelligence vindicated his ability and his appointment and recognition as the father of ancient British intelligence (Mandelbaum 17).

Having discovered the weakness of the country, Walsingham thought of the idea of implanting agents to spy for the State in diverse states in Europe. The rationale behind the implantation of agents was to spy on the political development in the regions in which they were implanted. The main areas of focus for the agents were the political events in the regions and their implications on the security of England.

Walsingham deployed agents in each of the foreign courts that prevailed in Europe, as well as within the conspiracies of domestic plotters. This enabled him to thwart repeated efforts by foreign countries to launch attacks on the British soil. The application of science in intelligence also began with Walsignham, where he is argued to have used the new mathematical science of code breaking to intercept messages between ambassadors and kings.

This enabled him to learn of the developments between states without necessarily availing his agents in certain regions of Europe. He also established subtle disinformation camps, which were used in foiling England foes and beguiling her allies. The scheme was effective in capturing “Mary Queens of Scots” during her attempt to assassinate “Queen Elizabeth 1”.

Walsingham was a genius in covert operations and his techniques have remained exemplary in the modern exercise of espionage. The assurance of security and the establishment of England as an empire are highly attributed to the work of Walsingham (Louis 184).

Literature on the work of Walsingham denotes a certain kind of power that made him to discharge his work in a firm way. It is argued that Walsingham did not fully subject himself under the Queen; rather, he executed certain decisions devoid of the direction and command from his supposed boss- Queen Elizabeth I.

However, what matters is the validity of the decisions and their contributions to the stabilization of security in England. One of the examples that are offered is the execution of the Queen of Scots after the discovery that she was planning for the assassination of Queen Elizabeth I.

One main concern by researchers of Walsingham’s works concerns the question of whether he owed his allegiance to the Queen or to his work as the lead spy agent of the Queen. Some researchers base on the methods that were used by Walsingham to justify their opinion (“The Queen’s Agent: Francis Walsingham at the Court of Elizabeth I” 261-262).

Standardizing the methods that were used by John often results in the negative view about a number of tactics that he deployed in eliminating threats to the Queen and England. This opens up into the evaluation of the standards of espionage and to what level the standards ought to be adhered to.

Among the debates that surrounded the work of Walsingham was his view that Elizabeth had miscalculated his steps in failing to prosecuting Mary in the Ridolphi Plot. The trial and subsequent execution of Mary is termed as one of the most unheeding episodes over 20 year’s work of Walsingham, yet it still does not draw away his contribution to the establishment of the pillars of intelligence in England and the other parts of the world.

During the discharge his duties, he emphasized on the use of espionage tactics through verbal and written tactics. This is what aided him in most of the courses that were pursued under his leadership, thereby resulting into his depiction as the father of intelligence (Adams 60).

Conclusion Sir Francis Walsingham is termed as the father of the modern intelligence. This paper has explored the life and work history of Sir Francis Walsingham in order to ascertain the worth of this assertion. From the discussion in the paper, it can be concluded that the basis of modern national intelligence systems is strongly founded on the works of Walsingham as he worked as a semester for Queen Elizabeth I.

He developed and deployed different spy techniques like the use of spy agents, something that is highly replicated in modern espionage tactics by governments.

Works Cited “The New Encyclopaedia Britannica.” Chicago, IL: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1998. Print.

“The Queen’s Agent: Francis Walsingham at the Court of Elizabeth I.” Contemporary Review 294.1705(2012): 261-262. Print.

Adams, Simon. “The Queen’s Agent.” History Today 62.1 (2012): 60-61. Print.

Budiansky, Stephen. Her Majesty’s Spymaster: Elizabeth I, Sir Francis Walsingham, and the Birth of Modern Espionage. New York, NY: Viking, 2005. Print.

Fitzgerald, Peter. Sir Francis Walsingham. n.d. Web. http://www.thefinertimes.com/Spies/sir-francis-walsingham.html

Hadden, Briton, and Henry R. Luce. Time. New York: Time Inc., 1923. Print.

Louis, Kruh. “Sir Francis Walsingham.” Cryptologia 30.2(2006): 184-184. Print.

Mandelbaum, W. Adam. “The 16th-Century Founders of British Intelligence often used Sorcery to Obtain Information.” Military History 21.3(2004), 12-13. Print.

[supanova_question]

Eminence Green: Patagonia Corporation Essay essay help online free

Introduction This article highlights how an entity created a niche for itself in the corporate world. Patagonia, the entity in question was founded by Yvon Chouinard and operates in the sporting sector. Yvon turned his passion for outdoor and adventurous activities into a viable business venture. Subsequently, he embarked on a path which has culminated in the creation of an entity that has challenged conventional corporate philosophies.

The article also details the impacts of research, innovation, creativity and entrepreneurship skills in Yvon’s business. This has allowed the entity to deviate from the strategies adopted by most corporations. As such, Patagonia has become the ideal corporation, which has established a balance between capitalism and corporate social responsibility (CSR). In most corporations, capitalism and the need to generate profits has resulted in the erosion of values on which entities were based.

Yvon has adopted a radical approach in corporate management. He is unwilling to compromise on numerous policies that Patagonia has adopted.

Most entities begin as private companies. Nonetheless, they go public once they become a force in the market. This is a path which Yvon is unwilling to pursue. Such a corporate choice would change the policies of the organization in entirety as the management would focus on maximizing the shareholders’ value rather than undertaking policies which will benefit the clients in terms of value delivery.

The entity has diverted from convectional human resource management hence; employees are key stakeholders in the organization. Moreover, the organization has adopted a culture, which is relevant to the organization’s industry. This is crucial for motivating employees and leaving a long lasting image in the clients’ minds in regard to its culture and services.

The model adopted by this organization has created a precedent that many organizations cannot emulate. The current corporate world is dominated by large monopolistic entities that make it tough for small organizations to break into the mainstream market. Patagonia, via its inspiration founder Yvon, provides an example of how small entities can establish a market segment that large entities cannot take over.

I believe that creativity and innovation will be central to the success of smaller entities. An example of an innovation in Patagonia is the development of swim suits that are more comfortable and attractive. These qualities denote some of the customers’ main concerns. The large entities have been unable to reach this milestone, giving Patagonia a competitive edge.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The above accomplishments are also attributable to partnerships with various entities in the polyester and cotton production sector. Yvon has been brilliant at establishing strategic partnerships, which have spurred Patagonia forward. Such partnerships have given this entity a competitive edge that many entities in the sector cannot achieve.

Based on the strategic, managerial and operational decisions that Patagonia has implemented, it would only be logical to acknowledge Yvon’s skills in corporate matters. He has been honoured by many institutions for being a key player in transforming corporate governance. He has realized this by leaning away from corporate governance that is primarily motivated by capitalism.

The ideas postulated in the passage have multiple applications in real life. Many potential investors face questions such as how do I start a business? Which sector is the most profitable? How will my business perform against the powerful businesses? The article answers these queries by revealing how Yvon turned his passion into a viable commercial venture. The ideas in the passage reveal how he addressed those queries. In real life, potential entrepreneurs should invest in sectors that they are passionate about.

Conclusion I have noted with concern that many other important issues of corporate governance have taken precedence over profitability. These issues include conservation of the environment and CSR. The entity spends large amounts of its revenues on such undertakings. Such policies would be treasonous in the current corporate world. The radical approach to management adopted by Yvon has contributed massively to Patagonia’s success. Moreover, its failure to go public has enabled Patagonia to retain its corporate innocence.

[supanova_question]

Dippin’Dots Expansion Strategies Essay essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Diversification of Dippin’Dots

The corporate strategy applied by the company

The business level strategy applied by the company

The company entrepreneurial strategy

How the company managing intellectual assets

The cross border strategy the company is using

Introduction Founded and incorporated in 1988, Dippin’Dots Inc. specializes in making ice cream. Originally, the company was targeting the American market but later diversified into the world market. The company is touted as the “Ice Cream of the Future” meaning its products were targeting the younger generation.

Though the company markets were majorly domestic, it expanded into the international markets majorly in the middle and the Far East Asian countries including Japan, Philippines South Korea as well as Australia. Today, Dippin’Dots products could be shopped from major stores, shopping malls, water parks, amusement parks and all festivity venues all over the world.

The report will be examining the expansion strategies used by companies in particular the case of Dippin’Dots Inc. The case study analysis of Dippin’Dots Inc. will be looking at the company diversification strategies including its corporate level strategies, the business level strategies, the entrepreneurial strategies, and the cross border strategies. The analysis will also include how the company is managing its intellectual properties.

Diversification of Dippin’Dots Dippin’Dots Inc. is a highly diversified company particularly in terms of products as well as its operations. The company started with a single product line and operation. The company began by selling BB-size pellets of flash frozen ice cream that was combined with some two dozen flavors.

The products were majorly sold to franchisees and the national account. However, by 2010, the company has diversified its operations as well as its product lines. The product lines included Dot Delicacies that targeted the international market. The Dippin’Dots expansion strategy contributed to the production of more product line moving away from ice creams to uniquely brewed coffee.

The technology used in the manufacture of these products is similar. The instant freezing below the normal freezing point that was used in the production of the ice cream was also applied in the production of new product lines such as the coffee brews. The sales strategy also improved. Before, the company was targeting the younger generation however, its target market has matured and the new products was targeting the older generation. Therefore, the company is diversified both in terms of products as well as in terms of market.

The corporate strategy applied by the company Dippin’Dots Inc. is using related corporate strategy where the company is using its operations to expand and remain competitive into the market. Since the company was already in the ice cream and related industry, the major issue in the corporate strategy is how to put together its operations to boost its combined performance, leverage its value chain fits and establish its investment priorities.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The first corporate strategy is to sell its products to franchisees both within the United States and internationally. However, during the flat periods the company was faced with a dilemma of whether to reduce the number of franchisees or increase the number of franchisees. Increasing the number of franchisees means additional cost to the company amid flattened market.

However, the company strategy of expanding into the new market remains. The popularity and reputation of the company products has enabled its expansion into the new market. It must keep its franchises at operational level particularly when the market continues to flatten.

Nevertheless, the company is quit stringent when taking advantage of the franchising opportunities. In fact, the company is exploiting two area of monopolizing opportunities that are characterized by an even and storage. That is event-based and store based monopolizing prospects.

The company invested huge amounts for it to acclaim some of the locations, which are suitable for its business. In addition, the company has to ensure that its stores are located in areas close to big restaurants, visible and have good combination of persons on foot and auto traffic. All its franchisees in the world have these similarities. Moreover, its products must also be sold in major social events.

Besides its organized franchising strategy, the company is efficient in its value chain management. The company products are distributed to the franchisees stores within the shortest time possible before its competitors. The way the company manages its distribution channels add value and make the corporation be more competitive.

In addition, the super-cold conditions the company products are made in and stored increases the complexity of the company products. Therefore, the company products could not be found in the normal freezers both at homes and at the normal stores.

Moreover, the products must be transported in special containers and sold in their own stores. Under such conditions, the company must be effective and efficient in its distribution of the products to the market. The efficiency in value chain management becomes the competitive advantage to the company.

We will write a custom Essay on Dippin’Dots Expansion Strategies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The business level strategy applied by the company Even though the company is selling ice creams and brewed coffee, the products are highly differentiated making the Dippin’Dots products unique and attractive in the market. The Dippin’Dots ice creams and brewed coffee have diverse flavors that differentiate them from other brewed coffee and ice creams.

The ice creams were manufactured in flash-frozen beads that were typically served in vending packages or cups. On average, the ice creams have 90 calories and 9 grams of fat depending with the kind of flavor. The quantity of calories and fats are lower compared with other ice creams.

In fact, Dippin’Dots is a combination of the old-fashioned handmade ice creams and the space age technology. Their minute round droplets of ice creams that are manufactured under sub-zero temperatures, given out at similar temperatures characterize Dippin’Dots’ products.

The freezing process is achieved using liquid nitrogen making the Dippin’Dots’ ice creams maintain their taste and originality that could not be found in any other product. The sub-zero temperatures nearly take away the entire entrapped ice and air making Dippin’Dots’ ice cream has clean aroma and tough feel.

Not only Dippin’Dots find new ways of making ice cream but the products have proved to be much more flavorfully and richer than the normal ice creams. In essence, the Dippin’Dots products are differentiated from the competitions in terms of nutrients and richness. The market need ice creams with low fats but increased calories.

With technological advantage in production, the company offers products at low cost. In other words, the company products are affordable and are of high quality compared to the competing products. In addition, the company first position in the industry has enabled its products to be sold globally particularly on new markets. The innovativeness in the product line has also increased the company competitiveness in both domestic and international markets.

The company entrepreneurial strategy Dippin’Dots is taking any opportunity to market its products or introduce its products into the market. After reinventing the frozen dessert the company patented the technology used and opened the stores where the product have to sold.

Within a few days after introducing the product into the market, it is distributed to the franchisees, the company stores as well as other selling points around the world. The product was transported from the production point to other destinations around world through either tracts or ships. The huge product delivery was attributed to marketing strategies that the company had put in place.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Dippin’Dots Expansion Strategies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In fact, all its franchisees were putting half of the revenue into marketing or rather advertising the products. The company always targeted the younger generation and will always put in place strategies to get them attracted. Often, the firm associates its products with the celebrities. Most of the company products are being sold at parks and sports venues as well as schools. Therefore, the company will take every opportunity to market and sell its products at any opportune moment.

Given the fact that there are quite a number of similar products in the market, Dippin’Dots continues to differentiate its products according to the needs of the market. The company will always conduct the market research to understand and know the market needs and develop a product accordingly. In addition, the company increased its marketing including advertising, which has enabled its products to be known across the market niche.

How the company managing intellectual assets The company successes have been attributed to the way the company have been managing its human resources. The company was started as a family business. However, as the business expands it required more innovative personnel to run most of its expanded functionalities. The business required marketers, the chief executives, and the franchisees managers as well as the stores managers. The way the company operates and manages in value chain requires highly innovative personnel.

With the type of structure, competitiveness of the industry and products, the company requires knowledge based strategy that is mainly personalization with some degrees of codification. In other words, the company required personnel that will increase its key strategic activities in the value chain management that will in turn make its products be distinctive in the market.

Moreover, the company requires personnel that understand the corporate, business and entrepreneurial strategies in order to increase its competitive advantage. In other words, the company requires a group of experts that will foster new inventions and new technologies, which will in turn enable the company continue producing unique products that will increase its competitive advantage.

So far, the company has retained its founder and inventor Jones as chief executive to chart the way forward. As chief executive of the company, Jones is investing in research and development to create conventional ice cream product that has super frozen dots embedded in it.

Jones was developing a new product that could withstand conventional freezers while preserving the super frozen dots in the ice cream. While these could only solve the domestic problem, Jones has to invent new products for its international markets. Jones came up with Dots Delicacies commonly known as the as the Dots Treats to be introduced in the international market.

Moreover, the company has started its online venture by selling some of its products through its website. The purchases could be made online and the products delivered according to the specification of the customers. The company has also branched out and increased its coffee based products. In fact, the coffee products were manufactured based on new concepts. For instance, frappe and espresso that could be eaten by spoon or could be made into hot coffee drinks by just adding water and milk.

The other untapped market that Jones and his team tried to enter was the market of healthy ice cream. Jones and its team, as a healthier alternative to ice cream, introduced the low fat frozen beaded dessert called Chillz made with all natural sweetner. The highly innovative team made this product targeting public schools and was distributed to schools through vending channels.

Despite the development of new products, the company experiences and resources were directed in the ice cream manufacturing and scoop shop retailing business. Dealing with supermarkets chains and vending distribution firms proved to be challenging to the firm.

However, opportunities could still be pursued through the enlargement of the franchise and national account business for scoop shops and vending machines. The company chief executive and his team has to continue assessing the situation and choose the best alternative option that would ensure the growth of the company.

In essence, the company has utilized its human resources accordingly to ensure that its products remain competitive. Moreover, the technological knowhow of the founder has enable the firm retain its leadership in product development. The distinct products in the market has enabled the firm retain its competitive advantage. Therefore, proper use of the firm’s knowledge increases its competitiveness in the both domestic and international market.

The cross border strategy the company is using In the cross border strategy, the firm is selling standardized products that are adaptable to the local market. For instance, the company is selling ice creams and brewed coffee, which is unique and highly differentiated making the Dippin’Dots products attractive to the international and local market.

The Dippin’Dots ice creams and brewed coffee have diverse flavors that further differentiate them from other brewed coffee and ice creams being manufactured elsewhere in the world. In addition, the ice creams are being manufactured in flash-frozen droplets that were classically served in retailing packages or special made saucers.

The characteristic that is unique only to the Dippin’Dots products. Moreover, the attributes adds more value compared to other products manufactured by other companies selling in the global market. In terms of content, the ice creams have high calories and low fat depending with the kind of flavor. The high calories and low fats of the company ice creams increase the products likability internationally.

In fact, Dippin’Dots is a combination of the old-fashioned handmade ice creams and the space age expertise, a unique combination that could not be found with any company. The other innovativeness in the company products that enable international market penetration includes the product shapes, which are for all time in miniature round droplets.

In addition, the products are frozen below zero temperatures by liquid nitrogen that does not remove the original flavor as do the freezing process in other products. The originality of flavor is what differentiates Dippin’Dots products. Moreover, the sub-zero temperatures practically get rid of the entire rapt ice and air making the final product has spanking new taste and solid touch.

All these characteristics could hardly be found in most of the products in the international market. The internationalization strategy that the firm has adopted enabled its products to be sold in most of the stores globally. Though the company might use other strategies in its global expansion, internationalization becomes the major strategy.

[supanova_question]

Human resource management: Price Waterhouse Coopers Essay cheap essay help

Introduction Human resource can be defined as the individuals’ contributions to an organization in terms of efforts, skills and capabilities, thus enabling the organization to maintain its existence. On the other hand, human resource management (HRM) is the division of the organization that deals with the management of human resource (Dessler, 2008, p. 4).

Human resource management can be looked at in two different perspectives: First, human resource management is the personnel or support function in the firm. They provide backing to the HRM issues to keep workers in line, or individuals who are directly involved in the production process. Secondly, Human resource management is a duty of the senior level staff. Whether in the formal or informal sector, the management of employees is always a function of the managers (Sokun, 2004, p. 3).

The management and staffing in organizations are done by individuals and without these individual organizations cannot exist. As a matter of fact, the prospect and challenges of developing and managing an organization is normally caused by individual-related problems that originate within them (Cascio, 2006, p. 43).

On the other hand, individual-related problems often originate from the misconception that all people are equal and deserve equal treatment in organizations. However, this is far from the truth. No two humans are precisely the same, even with identical or fraternal twins. Each and every individual is unique both physically and psychologically (Cascio, 2006, p. 43).

Even among individuals who are almost the same physically they must have different psychological characteristics. A number of them will be sociable, others snobbish; some will be gifted, others not. The point this study is trying to bring up is that the disparities among individuals in an organization call for more attention in order to maximize their potential. It also enables the organization to enhance efficiency and optimize the use of its human capital (Cascio, 2006, p. 43).

Managing human capital is an important role of the managers because of the current changes both within and without the organization. Studies have shown over and over again that HRM practices cam makes a significant, feasible difference in terms of crucial organizational results (Sokun, 2004, p. 3).

Maintaining a high level HRM system promotes strengthens employee commitment and loyalty which is very important in attaining business objectives. This applies to all types of businesses whether public or private. The success of any organization depends on the ability of the human resource department to acquire and assign individuals to a right job and pass on to them the necessary skills and knowledge (Wexley

[supanova_question]